JP6852782B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed as a display device. configuration has been proposed to be executed in.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-319221

By the way, in such a game machine, there is a demand for a game machine with further improved interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of further improving the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 has a game area in which the game ball can flow down and a launching means capable of causing the game ball to reach the game area by varying the firing intensity. The game area has at least a first game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means at one firing intensity can flow down, and a predetermined gaming area different from the one firing intensity. It has a second game area different from the first game area where the game ball launched at the firing intensity can flow down, and a first ball entry means into which the game ball can enter is provided in the first game area. , The second entry means different from the first entry means capable of entering the game ball into the second game area, the first entry means capable of entering the game ball, and the second entry means. A third ball entry means different from the means is provided, and the second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launching means at the one firing intensity cannot enter. , The first determination means for executing the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the third ball entry means, and the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Based on the above, the second determination means for executing the second determination different from the first determination, the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the first determination means, and the second determination means. A display control means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means at the same time, and the first action of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means. A first dynamic display period determining means for determining the target display period, and a second dynamic display period determining means for determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means. When the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, or the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result is stopped. When displayed, the specific game corresponding to each is executed, and at least based on the fact that the first condition that can be satisfied by executing the first determination is satisfied, the game state is the first. It can be established by setting a second gaming state in which the specific game is more likely to be executed based on the second determination result than in the first gaming state, and executing the first determination in the case of the second gaming state. The first dynamic display when the second game state is set by the game state setting means for setting the first game state and the game state setting means based on the establishment of the second condition. Period An effect executing means that suggests a period during which the second gaming state can be continuously set based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the interval determining means, and an effect executing means provided in the second gaming area. Among the specific games, the specific ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the first specific game that is executed when at least the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed. , And when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the first dynamic display for showing the dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means. The mode is displayed smaller than the second dynamic display mode for showing the dynamic display of the second identification information .

According to the game machine according to claim 1, the game machine has a game area in which the game ball can flow down, and a launch means capable of causing the game ball to reach the game area with variable firing intensity. The game area is launched at least in a first game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means at one firing intensity can flow down, and at a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity. It has a second game area different from the first game area where the game ball can flow down, and the first game area is provided with a first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, and the second game. A second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means capable of entering the game ball, and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means capable of entering the game ball into the region. The third ball entry means is provided, and the second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launching means at the one firing intensity cannot enter, and the first entry means is provided. Based on the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the ball entering the ball means or the third entry means, and the game ball entering the second entry means. The second determination means for executing the second determination different from the first determination, the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the first determination means, and the second determination result of the second determination means. determining a display control unit which can be dynamically displayed on the second identification information and at the same time displaying means, a first dynamic display period of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed by the display control means for indicating It has a first dynamic display period determining means for determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and a second dynamic display period determining means for determining the second dynamic display period. When the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, or when the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed. , The specific game corresponding to each is executed, and at least based on the fact that the first condition that can be satisfied by executing the first determination is satisfied, the game state is higher than that of the first game state. A second game state in which the specific game is easily executed based on the second determination result is set, and in the case of the second game state, a second condition that can be satisfied by executing the first determination is satisfied. Based on the above, when the second game state is set by the game state setting means for setting the first game state and the game state setting means, the first dynamic display period determination means determines. Of the specific games provided in the second game area and an effect executing means that suggests a period in which the second game state can be continuously set based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined. A specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter during the first specific game, which is executed when at least the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the display means is provided with the first dynamic display mode for showing the dynamic display of the first identification information. It is displayed smaller than the second dynamic display mode for showing the dynamic display of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time of the probability variation upper limit value in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the various counters, the special symbol holding ball storage area, the special symbol holding ball execution area, the normal symbol holding ball storage area, and the normal symbol holding ball execution area in the 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table in the first embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the RAM of the main control device 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the addition time selection table 222b in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the sort hold storage area in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the sort hold storage area in the first embodiment. .. It is a figure which shows typically the process of rearranging the reserved symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the process of rearranging the reserved symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead update process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead update process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation monitoring process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud monitoring process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity display update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the probability variation period notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents in a small hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the small hit selection table in the second embodiment. It is a diagram schematically shown, and FIG. 1C is a diagram schematically showing a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol display (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in the front view, and a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a first starting port 63a, and a first. The two starting ports 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first starting port 64, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the right side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is a gate type start port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery held for the passing of the game ball to the normal symbol start port 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit.

When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display unit 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "×" are displayed. After the symbols of No. 1 are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (a symbol of “◯” or “×” in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit). If a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display unit 88, the number of passages is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. Is displayed by.

When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol was a hit, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 640a operates, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a, which is normally maintained in an upward standing state, is determined counterclockwise from a state in which the ordinary electric accessory 640a stands up substantially vertically. A state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start port 640 by rotating the game ball by an angle (40 degrees in the present embodiment) and guiding the game ball to the second start port 640 by the ordinary electric accessory 640a (special). State). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order, "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was out of order, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88. At this time, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed among the balls winning in the first starting port 64, the second starting port 640, and the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. The number of balls is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on the winning of the first starting port 64 (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the 7-segment is blinking). After that, the stop display is displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. If the determination result is out of alignment, the central one segment is lit and a symbol "-" indicating the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Further, the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but the fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to the dynamic display mode related to time information. Further, the fluctuation pattern can be divided into a long-term fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time and a short-time fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time, depending on the fluctuation pattern that becomes reach and the fluctuation pattern that does not reach. In this way, even when the time is roughly sorted by a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the time information is dynamic. Corresponds to the display mode.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, long reach 1 to 4 is set as a long-term fluctuation pattern. These long reach 1 to 4 are set as a fluctuation pattern that can be selected for the first special symbol (special figure 1) when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong in the high probability state (probability change). Has been done.

Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time is also applicable to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern (for example, is it a long-time fluctuation pattern? Information about time information determined based on (whether or not, etc.) (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation, etc.) is also applicable.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for winning a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, a winning or not judgment (big hit lottery) of whether or not a jackpot is made is performed, and a judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. Do. As the jackpot type determined here, two types of jackpot A (15R jackpot) and jackpot B (14R jackpot) are set as the jackpot type of the first special symbol. Further, as a jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of jackpot C (15R jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10C).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as the winning devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 is operated so that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for the 1R (round) to 14R of the jackpots A to C. Further, the second variable winning device 650 is operated so that the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at the 15th round of the jackpot A and the jackpot C.

In the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is controlled so as to shift to the high probability state (probability variation state) by winning the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot B, the second variable winning device 640 is not operated, so that the configuration does not shift to the high probability state. Further, the jackpot A and the jackpot C are jackpots that can be shifted to a high probability state.

Further, if the execution result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit based on winning the first starting port 64, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in doublet. It is notified that it was a big hit. However, from the third symbol, it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, and the player can play the jackpot game while performing the jackpot. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be a jackpot A. Then, from the 14th round, when the player shifts to the next round, the second variable winning device 650 is activated, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, the player has a jackpot type of jackpot A. Is recognized, a game ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, and the game can be performed so as to shift to a high probability state after the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot type, it is determined whether or not to give the player a state capable of shifting to a high probability state. Then, the player can play the game so as to decide to shift to the high probability state by making the game ball win the second specific winning opening 650a by himself / herself. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 79 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) for the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, and is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 to have a third symbol (first symbol). A third symbol display device 81 is provided, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variations of the special symbol and the second special symbol).

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that the third symbol display device 81 is as shown in FIG. 4A. Left (left side display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right (right side) indicating the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state), which is one of the third symbols, in one display area Dm. Three symbol strings in the display area Dm3) are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variablely displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol columns L1, L2, and L3 are displayed, respectively, on the left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed as the symbol sequences R1, R2, and R3 in the same manner as the first special symbol, and the variable display is performed in the same manner.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot movie is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn is formed on the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol string indicating a first special symbol or a second special symbol (depending on the game state) is displayed. In the second display area Dn, two types of symbol rows of "○" and "×" as shown in FIG. 4 (b) are displayed in parallel in two rows, and two "○" symbols are left and right. When displayed in a column, it is configured to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol was a hit.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal gaming state), the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the second display area Dn. The third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation gaming state) or a time-saving gaming state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Then, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn.

Further, in the jackpot game state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in the state displayed before the jackpot game is started, and the display area is based on the fact that the game state is switched after the jackpot game. Is switched.

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It provides a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 4A, sub-display regions Ds are formed below the first display region. As shown in FIG. 4B, the reserved symbol “●” corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved symbol “▲” corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, so that the sub-table display area Ds has four reserved symbols "●" and the reserved symbol "●". ▲ ”is displayed at the maximum for each of the four. As will be described in detail later, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds are rearranged and displayed in the variation start order in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the display contents during the probability change (during the probability change game state) displayed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the third symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the probability change. When the game shifts to the probabilistic gaming state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 4 (a)), and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is the second display area. It is displayed in Dn. Then, in the first display area Dm, the characters "until the end of the probability change ..." are displayed to notify the shortest time until the end of the probability change game state, and the shortest time remaining until the end of the probability change is displayed below the time. It is digitally displayed in the order of minutes, seconds, and milliseconds.

Here, the shortest time until the end of this probability change is determined by a lottery within that time after determining the time until the jackpot B is started in the first special symbol. It has not yet been decided that the jackpot B will start in the first special symbol (it was determined that the one that won the jackpot B in the pending first special symbol lottery during the change has not been set). In the state, the shortest time is set within the time until the variation of the first special symbol, which has the latest variation start order of the stored first special symbol, is completed. Further, when there is no first special symbol being changed and there is no lottery for the first special symbol held, the shortest fluctuation time of the first special symbol (3 seconds in the present embodiment) is set. ..

As a result, the probabilistic gaming state is configured to be continued for the player until the jackpot B is started in the first special symbol, but the player can be notified of the remaining time of the probabilistic gaming state. Therefore, the player can feel as if the period of the probabilistic gaming state is set by the time, and before the time elapses, let the jackpot A or the jackpot C win and continue the probabilistic state. You can play the game with the expectation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 5A, the first special symbol that is changing and the first special symbol that is reserved and stored are all out of the pass / fail judgment result, and the first special symbol that has the latest change start order. The time until the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the reserved ball of the symbol is completed is shown by taking the case of 10 minutes 9 seconds 05 milliseconds or more as an example.

Next, FIG. 5B is an example of a display mode in which the game ball enters the first starting port 64 from the state shown in FIG. 5A and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in other cases. It is a schematic diagram shown. The reserved symbol "●" of the first special symbol is increased by one and displayed. Here, as for the newly stored reserved ball of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 is selected, in which the hit / fail determination result is out of order and the out-of-order (5s) variation pattern is selected. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, the time until the variation of the first special symbol currently established is completed is added by 5 seconds. Then, an additional opportunity (in this embodiment, established by winning a prize in the first starting port 64) is established, and 5 seconds is determined from the additional lottery for the notification time (see FIG. 16) described later, and the notification time is set. The characters "5 seconds extension !!" indicating that 5 seconds have been added are displayed, and the time when 5 seconds have been added is also displayed on the digital counter.

Next, referring to FIG. 6 (b), the reserved spheres of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not memorized during the probability change, and the fluctuation of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the state of a state. In the configuration of the present embodiment, unless the fluctuation (lottery) is started in the first special symbol, the jackpot B that triggers the end of the probabilistic gaming state is not won, so that the probabilistic gaming state is substantially continued. It becomes a state. However, since the player is notified that the probabilistic game state is time-managed and ends after the specified period has elapsed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed. When the state is reached, the subtraction of the digital counter that notifies until the end of the probability change is stopped, and the character "Timer is stopped !!" indicating that the subtraction is stopped is displayed.

As a result, the player can take a break with peace of mind even when he / she wants to take a break in the toilet or the like by interrupting the game. In the present embodiment, the digital counter is set to stop when the fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol both stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is changing. If there is no jackpot A or jackpot B in the hold storage, the subtraction of the digital counter may be stopped based on the fact that the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped. In the present embodiment, the player plays the game mainly paying attention to the fluctuation of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Since the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, which is configured to have a small display area, it is difficult for the player to notice the fluctuation display, and the game is configured to play the game without paying attention to the fluctuation. There is. Therefore, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot B, it is difficult for the player to notice that the probabilistic game ends.

In such a configuration, the player pays attention only to the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, and therefore, once the change of the second special symbol is completed, the first one is followed. Even if the special symbol fluctuates, there is no interest and it is recognized that the game can be interrupted by taking a break or the like. Here, if the subtraction of the digital counter is stopped, the player can safely interrupt the game. On the other hand, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the subtraction of the digital counter is not stopped even though there is no holding ball, the player indicates that the period of the probabilistic game is subtracted. It can be recognized and the game can be continued without interruption. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game can be interrupted such as a break.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot B is won in the first special symbol and the probability variation game is completed will be described. In FIG. 6B, the jackpot B is won in the first special symbol, and the combination “◯” of the symbols indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed in parallel in the second display area Dn. After the jackpot B is executed, the game shifts to the normal game state, so the firing handle 51 is operated so as to launch the game ball with the strength to allow the game ball to flow down to the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the probabilistic game state. The game is played in the state where the firing handle 51 is operated (left-handed game) so that the game ball is fired with the strength of flowing the game ball to the left side of the variable display unit 80 from the state of being (right-handed game) (left-handed game). The text "Please return to left-handed" is displayed to notify the player to do so.

In addition, the remaining time of the digital counter is displayed as 0, and the characters "Probability change end !!" indicating that the probability change game state has ended are displayed. In this case, at the end of the jackpot B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display area Ds. Be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a calculation method for determining the remaining maximum period of the probabilistic gaming period in the probabilistic gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. In FIG. 7, three reserved spheres of the first special symbol are established, and during the fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern in which the reserved spheres 1 and 2 are out of alignment is selected (is), and the reserved sphere 3 is selected. Indicates a state in which it is determined that the jackpot B will be won. In this case, when the fluctuation of the holding ball 3 ends, the probability variation gaming state ends. Therefore, the maximum period until the probability variation end time is the time until the retention 3 ends the fluctuation. Therefore, the sum of the remaining fluctuation time during fluctuation and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in Holds 1 to 3 is determined to be the maximum period until the end of the probability change. Then, when the end of the probability change is determined, the period is set in the digital counter (the difference time is added to the displayed period and displayed).

In the present embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 is suspended up to four times, respectively. If a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 while the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the display area of the reserved symbol display area of the lower display area Ds Among the areas where the reserved symbols are not displayed, the reserved symbol "●" of the first lottery game is displayed in the reserved symbol display area (the reserved symbol display area on the left side) of the youngest number.

In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting port 640 while the second special symbol is variable, the reserved symbol of the second lottery game "▲" is below, as in the case of winning the first starting port 640. It is displayed in the reserved symbol display area of the side display area Ds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of two of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three, four, or more lottery games and the corresponding start-up are performed. Of course, it is also possible to provide each mouth so that each lottery result can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640, the first starting port switch or the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first start port switch and the second start port switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize.

If either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a jackpot, and if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the measurement of the variable time is interrupted during the jackpot period. However, the variable display will continue. After that, when the jackpot game is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted, and the fluctuation display is executed in the remaining fluctuation period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted and the fluctuation display is continued. Not limited to this, the fluctuation display during fluctuation may be temporarily stopped, and the remaining fluctuation time may be variablely displayed after the jackpot ends.

Further, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, h of the alphabet" in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

On the lower right side of the game area, a horizontally long rectangular first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 having a width shorter than that of the first variable winning device 65 are arranged. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the first special symbol becomes a stop symbol of the jackpot. The symbol display device 37 is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed in the corresponding display area (first display area Dm or second display area Dn) of the third symbol display device 81, so that a jackpot occurs. Shown. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). To.

The first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The order in which the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650a are opened and closed (opening round) is determined by the type of jackpot determined. For example, in the case of jackpot A and jackpot C, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened from the first round to the 14th round, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 15th round. Further, in the jackpot B, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable winning device 650a is not opened.

As described above, in the jackpot game, since the specific winning opening opened to the jackpot type is configured to change, the jackpot type can be determined depending on whether or not the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. Therefore, even if the player is not notified of the jackpot type by a symbol or the like, the player can be made to recognize the jackpot type at the open specific winning opening.

Further, the second specific winning opening 650a is configured as a winning opening that triggers a decision to give the player a probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot game. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the probability variation game state is set after the big hit game. In addition, when a game ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 game balls are used as prize balls for one game ball. It is configured to be paid out by the player.

Specifically, when the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are stopped and displayed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating a hit, the opening / closing operation is performed based on the jackpot type. It is set and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). Will be done.

The first variable winning device 65 covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and the second variable winning device 650 has a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a, and the front side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing on the side. The first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a. , It operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not win a prize in any of the winning openings 63 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as a left first starting port 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. The left first starting port 64 has an opening on the upper surface having a size capable of allowing one game ball to enter, and two nails are slightly larger than the diameter of the two game balls at the opposite positions of the opening. They are arranged at wide intervals. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the winning rate of the game game to the left first starting port 64 (for example, the number of game balls winning to the left first starting port 64 when 250 game balls are launched). It is configured so that the ratio of) can be changed.

Further, in the right side region of the variable display unit 80, a second start port 640 and a first start port 64 (hereinafter, referred to as a right side first start port 64) are arranged in parallel vertically. The second starting port 640 has an opening on the side surface of the decorative member attached to the game plate 60 into which one game ball can enter. On the front side (opposing surface) of the opening, a normal electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 is arranged. The ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls, and one end side is rotatably supported on the shaft. Then, based on the fact that the second symbol is a hit, the game ball is played for a predetermined number of times (once or twice in this embodiment) and a predetermined number of seconds (0.5 seconds or 1 second in this embodiment). Is configured to rotate at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in this embodiment) in a direction (a direction away from the opening) so that the can be guided to the second starting port 640. The ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In the normal state (other than when the second symbol hits), the opening of the second starting port 640a is maintained in a closed state (standing up in the vertical direction).

Further, the right first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640 as shown in FIG. When the normal electric accessory 640a is open (tilted to the horizontal direction), the ordinary electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the right first starting port 64. With this configuration, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure the game ball in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right first starting port 64.

In this embodiment, when the gaming states are the high probability state (probability variation state) and the time-saving gaming state, the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit is high. Further, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the player fires the gaming ball so that the gaming ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the gaming ball is won in the first starting port 64 on the left side. Perform the game to let you. Then, the third symbol becomes a hit, and the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit increases when the game shifts to the probabilistic game or the time-saving game. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol is likely to be a hit. Has been done. Therefore, the player executes the game by firing the game ball so as to pass through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game). In this case, since the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in the open state is high, it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 640, while the winning in the right first starting port 64 is reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to win the second special symbol than the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, 50% of the jackpots are jackpots that are likely to be given a probability change after the jackpot game, and the remaining 50% are likely to be given a time-saving game (low probability game state) after the jackpot game (low probability game state). It is configured so that a jackpot (which is difficult to give a probabilistic game) is given.

On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when a big hit is made, a big hit is given so that a probabilistic game is easily given after the big hit game at 100%. That is, the person who wins the second special symbol is more likely to be given the probabilistic game state.

Further, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the normal electric accessory 640a is opened, the distance between the tip of the ordinary electric accessory 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one or more and less than two game balls. It is an interval of. The through gate 67 is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the interval can easily pass through the through gate 67 having a gate-shaped opening. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the right first starting port 64 due to the nails arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, the game ball flows down to the opening side of the right first starting port 64 by a nail arranged above the opening of the right first starting port 64. It is configured at intervals (less than one game ball), and is configured to flow downward through the windmill as it is. That is, when winning a prize in the right first starting port 64, it is configured so as to be limited to the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a closed state (a state of standing upright in the vertical direction).

Further, during the probabilistic change state, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set as short as 3 seconds, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a is configured to be in the open state frequently. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right first starting port 640a during the probability change state. Therefore, when the probabilistic state is reached, the number of times the probabilistic state continues can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the game.

In the present embodiment, in the open state of the normal electric accessory 640a, the right first starting port 64 is not won, but the game ball flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 is the right first starting. The interval may be set so that the opening 64 can be won, and the ratio may be reduced so that the right first starting port 64 can be won.

Further, a first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 are arranged immediately below the first variable winning device 65 on the lower right side of the game area. The first variable winning device 65 is configured by closing the first specific winning opening 65a, which is a horizontally long opening through which a game ball can enter, by a door member that normally prevents the game ball from entering. There is. Then, in the case of a big hit of a special symbol, the door member rotates around the lower end as a rotation axis to a position perpendicular to the game plate 60, and the door member receives the flowing game ball. It is configured to guide the inside of the first specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged so that the second specific winning opening 650a, which is an opening having a narrower width than the first variable winning device, is a door member and normally regulates the entry of a game ball. Has been done. Then, when the special symbol is a big hit, the door member is configured to rotate to a position perpendicular to the game plate 60 with the lower both ends as rotation axes to receive the flowing game ball. In addition, when the game ball wins the second specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the probabilistic state is set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot A given when the first special symbol (special figure 1) becomes a big hit and the jackpot C given when the second special symbol (special figure 2) becomes a big hit. When and is executed, the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1st round (round) to the 14th round, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated only in the 15th round.

On the other hand, in the jackpot B given when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the first variable winning device 65 operates and the second variable winning device 650 operates from the 1st round to the 14th round. Since there is no such thing, the second specific winning opening 650a is not given an opportunity to win a prize, and it is difficult to give a probabilistic state.

In the present embodiment, in the low-probability game state, it is prohibited to play the game in the right-handed game, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 640 in the low-probability game state, an abnormal process is executed. An alarm display "Please play left-handed" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, in the low probability game state, when the game ball wins the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal may be output to the hall computer or the like. You may.

<Electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 9) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display result of the second symbol display unit 88. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a special hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display unit 88), and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second starting port 640 in which the counter value is stored for the winning of the first starting port 64. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are each provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and a total of a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, and various settings for variable display (dynamic display) of the first special symbol. And control processing is executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, and various settings and control processes for variable display of the second special symbol are performed. Is executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is the first starting port 64 or When the second starting port 640 is won, if the number of holdings for the winning starting port is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and the winning starting port is won. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the above. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 game balls in this embodiment) are not acquired. ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be four for each, and the upper limit value. You may not make a profit.

Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1. The special hit random number counter C1 is commonly acquired for the first start port 64 and the second start port 640.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the sphere wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port of the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 10B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (in this embodiment, "7" at the time of low probability and "0-9" at the time of high probability), it is determined as a big hit.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values (hits) that are big hits is 1 at low probability, the value "7" is 10, and the value "0-9" is big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 (starting winning). At the timing of the winning, the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port.

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order. For example, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203b is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation display effect. The type is the one at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 10A, various tables are stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a, and FIG. 10C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the special hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the first special symbol, and the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type dedicated to the second special symbol. The jackpot A is a jackpot composed of 15Rs (rounds), and the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R to the 14th R, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated at the 15th R. Here, the second variable winning device 650 is activated (opened) so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and when the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the jackpot A The game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability change state. As a result, the jackpot A becomes a jackpot type to which a probabilistic game can be given. The jackpot A is determined based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 64, and when the jackpot is hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired (the first starting port). It is a jackpot type that is determined to be one of 0 to 49 (acquired at the time of entering the ball 64).

Further, the jackpot B is a jackpot type composed of 14Rs, and the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1st round to the 14th rounds to execute the jackpot game. Therefore, since the second variable winning device 650 is not operated, the probability change state is not set after the end of the jackpot B. As a result, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot type to which the probability variation state is not given. The jackpot B is determined based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 64, and when the jackpot is hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired (the first starting port). It is a jackpot type that is determined to be one of 50 to 99 (acquired at the time of entering the ball 64).

The jackpot C is a jackpot of 15R like the jackpot A, and the first variable winning device 65 operates from the 1Rth to the 14th Rth, and the second variable winning device 650 operates at the 15th Rth. As a result, the jackpot C becomes a jackpot type in which a probability change state can be set after the jackpot game. The jackpot C is determined based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 640, and when a jackpot is obtained, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired (the first starting port). It is a jackpot type that is determined to be one of 0 to 99 (acquired when the ball enters 64). That is, in the second special symbol lottery, when a big hit is made, the big hit C is always determined and executed.

In this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on entering the ball into the first starting port 64, when the jackpot is reached, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are selected, respectively, with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on entering the second starting port 64, the jackpot C is selected with a 100% probability when it becomes a jackpot. Therefore, the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol. As a result, the player feels that it is more advantageous to execute the lottery with the second special symbol than with the first special symbol, so the player should play the game with the expectation that the lottery will be a big hit with the second special symbol. Can be done.

As described above, in the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C), the value of the special hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 10C, the value "0 to 49" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot A, and the value "50 to 99" of the special hit type counter C2 corresponds to the jackpot B. The value "0 to 99" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot C.

When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a big hit, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d in which the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored is stored. The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "20", the jackpot A is determined if it is the first special symbol, and the jackpot C is determined if it is the second special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description of various counters will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0.

The value of the variable type counter CS1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

11A to 11B show a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is a schematic diagram. The variation pattern selected in the normal gaming state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described.

In FIG. 11A, a variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the hit / fail determination result is incorrect. It is a deviation (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (normal) common fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, each fluctuation pattern type is assigned according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, with respect to the value "0 to 100" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the third symbol is stopped in the display mode of deviation, which is composed of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds (the third symbol is not displayed in the reach display mode). The variation pattern of the display mode) is set. For "101 to 160", a fluctuation pattern of normal reach composed of a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set. Further, for "161 to 198", a fluctuation pattern of super reach composed of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set. It should be noted that the fluctuation patterns selected here are fluctuation patterns in which the hit / fail determination result is out of order.

In this way, when the game state is the normal game state and the hit / fail judgment result is out of order, the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (5 seconds), is selected at a rate of about 50%. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is bored early because the fluctuation pattern of a long fluctuation time is selected and the game is delayed even though the hit / fail judgment result is wrong. Further, by sharing the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation between the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed evenly.

FIG. 11B shows a normal gaming state in which the game is in a game state, and a hit (normal) common variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the hit / fail determination result is a hit It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the selection table 202d schematically. In this hit (normal) common fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach composed of a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set for the value “0 to 10” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. For "11 to 150", a fluctuation pattern of super reach composed of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set. For "151 to 198", a fluctuation pattern composed of a fluctuation pattern for 60 seconds is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 (c) to 12 (b), when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern selection of the variation pattern selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol Table 202d will be described. As the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern selected in the time saving game state is set, the hit (time saving) common variation pattern selection referred to when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit. Table 202d (FIG. 11 (c)) and the deviation (time reduction) that is referred to when the lottery result of the first special symbol is deviation. Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 12 (a)) and the second special symbol. The deviation (time reduction) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 12B), which is referred to when the lottery result is deviation, is set respectively.

FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (time saving) common variation pattern selection table 202d. The hit (time saving) common variation pattern selection table 202d is a variation pattern selection table selected when the hit / fail determination result in the time saving gaming state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a hit. In this hit (time saving) common fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach composed of a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the game state is the time saving state, if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach that is a hit in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected. As a result, in the time-saving game state, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (5 seconds), is selected. It is possible to shift to a jackpot game. Here, the details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol has started the fluctuation display in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, the fluctuation starts later. In the special symbol to be played, it is controlled so as to forcibly result in a hit / fail judgment result. Therefore, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, it is possible to prevent the game from being unnecessarily delayed by selecting a relatively short fluctuation time.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the variable display that becomes a big hit does not fluctuate at the same time, but the variation display that becomes a big hit can be performed at the same time. When configured, the variation display time that is the jackpot of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first special symbol is used. The fluctuation time that becomes the jackpot of the symbol may be configured so that a fluctuation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol, which may determine the jackpot B, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, and in the meantime, the second special. A jackpot C can be given to the player by making a jackpot with a symbol. In this case, if a big hit is started with one special symbol, the lottery game that is changing in the other special symbol may be invalidated. With this configuration, the jackpot C, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is given, and the probability variation game state is determined immediately after the probability variation game state is set, and the probability variation game state ends in a short period of time. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned configuration in which the fluctuation display in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, the hit / fail judgment result in the first special symbol is a deviation. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the fluctuation time of the hit / fail judgment result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be used during the time-saving game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner) can be reduced, and the number of times the lottery for the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, can be increased. If the number of time reductions is until the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changed 100 times in succession due to the deviation of the second special symbol. It is possible to effectively reduce the number of times that the second special symbol is variablely displayed during the time-saving game by configuring the time longer than the time when the variable display is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12A, it is one of the variation pattern selection tables 202d in which the variation pattern selected when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is out of order is set. The deviation (time saving) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (time saving) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In the deviation (time reduction) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach whose fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and the fluctuation time are shown. The fluctuation pattern of the special reach configured for 30 seconds and the semi-long fluctuation pattern configured for the fluctuation time of 300 seconds are set by allocating the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 respectively. Specifically, the deviation pattern is set for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 50", and the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is set for "51 to 100". , "101-169" are set with special reach fluctuation patterns, and "170-198" are set with semi-long fluctuation patterns.

Here, in the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set high and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 640a is long until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times. (Normally 0.2 seconds is extended to 1 second), and the number of times of opening is large (normally once is set to 2 times). As a result, as a player, the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player (the jackpot C that can give the probabilistic game state in the case of a jackpot is always determined) is displayed in a variable manner as many times as possible. Expect to play a game. Therefore, in the deviation (time reduction) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the special reach and semi-long fluctuation patterns having a relatively long fluctuation time are selected from the deviation (time reduction) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d described later. It is set easily.

Therefore, there are many chances that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol having a long fluctuation time is selected, and the number of times that the first special symbol is changed in the time-saving gaming state can be reduced. Therefore, when a big hit is made during the time-saving game state, the big hit C can be easily given to the player.

In the semi-long fluctuation pattern, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed for 300 seconds, and then is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a deviation. In addition, the second special symbol, which will be described later, is configured so that if the hit / fail judgment result is wrong during the time reduction, the deviation pattern composed of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds can be easily selected. You can start 60 fluctuations with a special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to perform fluctuations (lottery) in the second special symbol during more time-saving games.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the semi-long is set to 300 seconds, but the fluctuation time is not limited to 300 seconds, and may be configured by a fluctuation time in which the second special symbol can fluctuate by a maximum of the number of time reductions or more in the deviation pattern. Further, it may be configured to set a fluctuation pattern of a longer fluctuation time separately from the semi-long.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12 (b), the deviation (time reduction) special figure 2 variation pattern selection in which the variation pattern selected when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol in the time reduction game state is deviation is set is set. Table 202d will be described. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (time saving) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the time-saving game state, the deviation variation pattern of the second special symbol is composed of a deviation variation pattern composed of a variation time of 5 seconds and a variation time of 10 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is set respectively. "0 to 180" is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the deviation pattern, and "181 to 198" is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach. It has been set.

As a result, in the time-saving game state, if the deviation pattern is out of order with a probability of 181/199 and the hit / fail determination result is out of the second special symbol, it is selected. Therefore, since the variation of the second special symbol can be executed in a short time, more lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more advantageous lottery opportunities by utilizing the time-saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 (c) to 13 (c), a variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state will be described.

FIG. 12C is a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table, which is a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol in the probability variation game state is deviation. It is 202d. FIG. 12 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of long reach 1 whose fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the fluctuation time are The fluctuation pattern of the long reach 2 composed of 100 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the long reach 3 composed of the fluctuation time of 500 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the long reach 4 composed of the fluctuation time of 1000 seconds, respectively. , It is set corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 10", and the fluctuation pattern of long reach 1 is set to "11 to 120". The fluctuation pattern of long reach 2 is set for "121 to 149", the fluctuation pattern of long reach 3 is set for "150 to 189", and the fluctuation pattern of long reach 3 is set for "190 to 198". The fluctuation pattern of the long reach 4 is set.

As described above, in the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, the variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected at a ratio of 188/199. Therefore, in the probabilistic game state, the variation display of the first special symbol makes it easy to select a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (30 seconds or more), and the number of variations of the first special symbol decreases. Further, as will be described later, in the probabilistic game state, the fluctuation time when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is wrong is set so that the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected at a ratio of 151/199. It is set so that an extremely short fluctuation time is selected as compared with the first special symbol.

Therefore, in the probabilistic gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is larger than that of the first special symbol. Further, in the probabilistic game state, the normal electric accessory 640a is set to be easily operated at the second start port 640, which triggers the start of fluctuation (lottery execution) of the second special symbol, so that the game ball is set to the first. It is configured to be easier to enter than the starting port 64. As a result, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol can be increased more than that of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give many opportunities for fluctuation (lottery) in the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the probabilistic gaming state can be given to the player for a longer period of time.

With reference to FIG. 13 (a), the hit (probability variation) special figure 1 variation which is the variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the variation pattern when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol in the probability variation game state is a hit. The pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In this hit (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, a special 1 variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds and a special 2 variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds are displayed as variation type counters, respectively. It is set according to the value of CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of special 1 is set for the value "0 to 190" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern of special 2 is set for "191 to 198".

As described above, in the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the probabilistic game state, either the fluctuation time of 3 seconds or the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected. Since it is mainly configured so that the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected, when the jackpot B is determined by using this 3 seconds, the ending of the probability variation period indicating the end of the probability variation game state. The display mode is displayed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of special 2 is selected and the jackpot B is determined, the effect that the probability variation period remains for a maximum of 30 seconds remaining is executed. Further, in the fluctuation pattern of the special 2, when the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds, the ending effect similar to the fluctuation pattern of the special 1 may be executed.

Further, when the fluctuation patterns of Special 1 and Special 2 are selected and the jackpot A is determined, an effect indicating that the probabilistic game state continues is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, an effect of stopping the counter indicating the remaining time of the probability variation period shown in FIG. 5A is executed, or an effect of adding so that the remaining time of the probability variation period does not become 0 seconds is executed. Further, once the ending is executed and the end of the probability change period is notified, a resurrection effect may be executed to show the player that the probability change period has been set again.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13 (b), the deviation (probability variation) of the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern selected when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state is deviation is set. ) Special FIG. 2 The variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation 1 composed of the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds and the fluctuation pattern of the deviation 2 composed of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds are shown. The fluctuation pattern of the normal reach composed of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach composed of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds are set corresponding to the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of deviation 1 is set for the value "0 to 150" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern of deviation 2 is set for "151 to 170", and "171 to 170". A normal reach variation pattern is set for "190", and a super reach variation pattern is set for "191 to 198".

In this way, as the fluctuation pattern selected when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state is wrong, the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds and a deviation of 1 is selected at a rate of 151/199. Will be done. Therefore, in the second special symbol, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the fluctuation pattern having an extremely short fluctuation time as compared with the first special symbol is selected, so that the fluctuation pattern is selected as compared with the first special symbol. The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of lottery with the second special symbol, and it is possible to increase the chances that the player is given the jackpot C. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the period in which the jackpot C is continuously determined and the probabilistic gaming state is continuously granted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13 (c), the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern selected when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state is a hit is set is the hit (probability variation). ) Special FIG. 2 The variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In the hit (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach composed of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach composed of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and the fluctuation time of 30 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the special reach composed of is set corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is special for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 150", the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is special for "151 to 190", and the fluctuation pattern is special for "191 to 198". Reach fluctuation patterns are set respectively.

In this way, when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a hit in the probabilistic game state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds or more is selected. When the second special symbol is a hit, the jackpot C to which the probability variation game state can be given is always determined after the jackpot game, so the probability variation using the fluctuation time set by the variation pattern is used. It is possible to perform various notification effects during the period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, an effect such as temporarily stopping the counter indicating the remaining time (period) of the probability variation period or adding a time of 10 seconds or more is executed. To. Here, any notification effect indicating that the probabilistic gaming state is continued for a long time can be appropriately executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variable at the same time, and when one of them starts to change to be a big hit, the other special symbol is used. It is configured to start the variable display that is forcibly off. In this configuration, when a big hit is made between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the type of big hit that can be given the probabilistic game state is set to be changed. By setting a difference between advantages and disadvantages for the player in the lottery between the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, the deviation time of the special symbol, which is disadvantageous, can be easily set for a long period of time. By configuring so as to execute many lottery in a short time with a special symbol which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to give the player more advantageous lottery.

In addition, when the probabilistic game state is reached, one special symbol (the first special symbol in the present embodiment) is set to the jackpot type to which the normal game state is given, and the other special symbol (the present implementation) is set. In the form, the second special symbol) is set so that the probabilistic game state is always set, so that the period during which the deviation change is executed in the special symbol to which the normal game state is given is probable. It is possible to notify the player as the period during which the game state continues.

Further, is the reserved ball for which the jackpot B (the jackpot type to which the normal game state is given) determined is stored in the reserved ball of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a described later? Is determined, the time until the jackpot B stops fluctuating is set as the maximum remaining period of the probability variation period, and the remaining period of the probability variation can be notified to the player within the time within the maximum remaining period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the probability change period is set in advance. In addition, by configuring the notification effect of the remaining time of the probability variation period to be linked with the actual time and subtracted, the player can start fluctuating the special symbol quickly, and in a high probability state advantageous to the player. I can get excited trying to run many lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game production. In addition, by performing an effect of gradually adding the remaining time of the probability change period and an effect of stopping the subtraction of the remaining time of the probability change period, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the probability change game state will continue for a long time. In addition to the big hit, it is possible to produce a production that gives the player expectations.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the rough fluctuation pattern content, reach, non-reach, etc., determines the fluctuation time, and determines the detailed fluctuation pattern content by voice. It is configured to be determined by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 may be configured to determine the details of the fluctuation pattern (reach display content, etc.). Alternatively, the main control device 110 may be configured to execute the determination control for the fluctuation pattern by the voice lamp control device 113 or another control device without determining the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, "reach" means that there are many different production contents in each reach. For example, in super reach, a reach that changes the rear image quickly and displays it, or a character is suddenly displayed. There are reach to be displayed, etc., and in addition, there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as one with a notice effect before the start of the variable display and one with a big hit effect in the re-variable display.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description of various counters will be continued. The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), the counter returns to 0. The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the ordinary symbol is set by the random number table 202c (FIG. 10 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the random number table 202c (FIG. 10 (d)) per normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit.

Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate). .. The number of random number values to be won is 24 in the normal gaming state, and the range is "5 to 28". Further, in the high-probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is "5-204". That is, in the normal game state, if the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined to be a winner, and in the high probability game state, the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 value. Is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and the symbol "○" is lit and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88 as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the normal electric accessory 640a. When the blade 640a is in the normal gaming state, the opening operation for a predetermined time (1.2s in the present embodiment) is performed once, and in the high probability gaming state, the opening operation for a predetermined time (1s in the present embodiment) is performed twice. Will be done. The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, the update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41).

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed and each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the counter value is not stored. A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, and is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is variablely displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the corresponding hold number (normal symbol hold 1 to 4) by the random number value acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to on, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the random value value is stopped, or the hold is exhausted, so that the previous hold is performed. If the data is shifted to the area, it will be set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Judgment as to whether or not data is stored in the hold area or whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is executed depending on which hold area or whether or not the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery By setting various counters dedicated to each game (second special symbol) and changing the update triggers and initial values of various counters between the first lottery game and the second lottery game, they are updated with different values. Of course, it may be composed of the counter values to be generated.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter values are acquired at the same opportunity, the counter values of different values can be acquired. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected between the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and a problem that the result of determining whether or not the result is synchronized.

In addition, even if the fluctuation patterns are selected from the common fluctuation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the problem that the selected fluctuation patterns are synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the stored data in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (a RAM having a small storage area or the like is used) can be obtained.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 40) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 39) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, and a first special symbol holding ball number. Counter 203e, 2nd special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, time saving counter 203k, jackpot post-hit state area , Big hit flag 203o, Special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p, Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, Special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, Sort hold storage area 203t, Status setting area 203u, Abnormality It has at least a monitoring flag 203v and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning a prize in the first starting port 64 up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment). It is a storage area for.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as those of the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. ..

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d are for counters when a start winning prize is detected. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 9) is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first start port 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and obtains the first value. The reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, and the variable type counter storage area 203a4, respectively. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting port 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding values are obtained. Each area (not shown) is similarly stored.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-mentioned first process such as a jackpot lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to one start prize among the data (counters C1 to C2, CS1 values) stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. The data is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning of the mouth 64 or the second starting port 640, the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 40, S1242) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is a counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 64. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls) is a counter value in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol hold ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1. Is.

The MPU 201 is the first when the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, respectively. 1 The data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is subjected to the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 22, S203) or the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 26, S203). Referencing in S206), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a fluctuation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203g allows the game ball to pass through the normal symbol start port 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter, “starting prize”). The variation display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variation display effect performed by the second symbol display unit 88 and the second symbol display device 88 of the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times each. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 40, S1242) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed (see FIG. 35, S1169).

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) is stored when the start winning prize is detected in the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the normal hit random number counter C4 is used from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data (counter C4 value, normal symbol flag 203j) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the normal symbol starting port 67 (starting prize) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of being digested earlier. Will be done.

Further, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning prize, each counter value is stored, and the winning lottery of the normal symbol or the first This is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting the display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, it executes a winning lottery, a display setting of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88, and the like. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning prize (value of the random number counter C4 per normal hit) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the normal symbol holding ball. Shift to the execution area 203i. The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored and held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, it is set to ON. Further, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next hold area (the hold area corresponding to the hold number in which the hold is exhausted and the hold number is reduced by one), the hold area before the shift is used. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to off, while the normal symbol flag 203j in the shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is processed to stop the fluctuation, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to off.

The time saving counter 203k is a counter area in which the time saving number 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the number of time reductions is set, the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability time is set in the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol until the number of time reductions is set to 0. Further, when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 640a have a longer opening time than the normal gaming state (1s in this embodiment). The opening operation is repeated twice. This gaming state is hereinafter referred to as a time-saving gaming state.

The time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates and stops displaying, and when the value of the time saving counter 203k becomes 0, the time saving game state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol When a random number table per ordinary symbol for a low probability of the hit random number counter 202c is set and a symbol "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time is 0.2 s. By setting the number of times of opening once, the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 640a are opened.

The jackpot post-hit state area 203m is a storage area in which the gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) set when the jackpot is executed is stored. In the initial setting, the data corresponding to the time-saving game state is stored, and the data corresponding to the probabilistic game state is stored based on the fact that the game ball enters the second specific entry port 650a during the jackpot game. To. As a result, even if the jackpot A or C that allows the game ball to enter the second specific entry port 650a is executed, the data set in the jackpot post-hit state area 203m becomes the data corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. 2 When the game ball enters the specific entry port 650a, the data corresponding to the probabilistic game state is set (overwritten). As a result, unless the game ball enters the second specific entry port 650a, the configuration does not shift to the probabilistic gaming state, and whether or not the game ball enters the second specific entry port 650a. The player can expect to play the game.

The jackpot flag 203o is turned on when the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is determined to be a hit at the start of fluctuation based on winning the first start port 64 or the second start port 640. This is the flag to be set. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed. In addition, it is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and "10" sets the jackpot flag 203o on for the first special symbol, and "01" sets the jackpot flag 203o for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203o is set as off.

Here, since the jackpot flag 203o is commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be on at the start of fluctuation. If so, even if the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203o is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as a loss. As a result, it is possible to process the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the variable display that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time.

That is, when the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is not started in the other, and only the out-of-order fluctuation mode is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203o common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and independent jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute the variable display that becomes a big hit at the same time. With such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display that becomes the jackpot B is started in the first special symbol during the probabilistic game state, the fluctuation time is set long and the fluctuation is short in the second special symbol. By making it easy to draw lots by time, it is possible to make it easy to make a big hit with the second special symbol before the big hit B is started. Therefore, the player is informed of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation game state ends), and the player is hurriedly won the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to perform an effect of playing a game in an attempt to make it play. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S1005 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S613 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 25, S204).

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S294) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S1012 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S207).

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S507 in FIG. 24). After that, in the process of S602 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), the counter value (one by one in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed variation time is subtracted and updated.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S907 in FIG. 28). After that, in the process of S1002 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIGS. 29, S207), the counter value (1 by 1 in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed variation time is subtracted and updated.

The sort hold storage area 203t is the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). It is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of the hold areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

FIG. 17A is a diagram schematically showing the sort hold storage area 203t. The sort hold storage area 203t corresponds to a hold data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each hold number of hold areas 1 to 8 is stored, and a first special symbol and a second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. It is composed of a changing data storage area in which each determination data is stored.

In each of the pending data holding areas 1 to 8, the hit / fail judgment result storage area 203t1, the jackpot type storage area 203t2, the variation pattern type storage area 203t3, the variation order storage area 203t4, the variation start time storage area 203t5, and the look-ahead probability variation flag 203t6 Are provided respectively. The holding areas 1 to 8 are stored in order from the holding area 1 in the order in which the holding balls are established (the overall formation order in which the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are combined). That is, the holding areas 1 to 8 indicate the order in which the holding balls are established in the pachinko machine 10 by combining the holding balls of the first special symbol and the holding balls of the second special symbol.

In the variable display data storage area, a hit / fail judgment result storage area 203t1, a jackpot type storage area 203t2, a fluctuation pattern storage area 203t3, and a look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Has been done.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114), the hit / fail determination result storage area 203t1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of preliminarily determining the validity of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

The jackpot type storage area 203t2 is set in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 203t3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). It is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on various data stored in is stored. This fluctuation pattern is data that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the fluctuation pattern, and the data in the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data to identify whether it is the data of.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114), the variable display order storage area 203t4 has the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It is a storage area in which the actual variation display start order in the determined reservation areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in. Specifically, the fluctuation display start order is determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of the newly stored reserved sphere and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each reserved sphere stored earlier. ..

The variation start time storage area 203t5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 calculated based on the various data stored in the variable display actually starts is stored. When the fluctuation display start time is stored in the hold area, it is updated at any time by another process (S112) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The look-ahead probability change flag storage area 203t6 is turned on when it is determined in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1133) described later that the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is jackpot A or jackpot C. It is a storage area that is set to and stored. Further, the look-ahead probability change flag storage area 203t6 is set to off because every time the data is shifted to the higher hold area and stored, all the areas before the shift are cleared to 0. That is, the look-ahead probability change flag storage area 203u6 once set to on is shifted to the changing data storage area, and is set to off by overwriting (shifting) new data in the changing data storage area. .. Further, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial value is set to off.

When the power is cut off in the pachinko machine 10, each data in the sort hold storage area 203t is backed up and stored in the backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read from the stored backup area and set.

The state setting area 203u is a storage area in which the current gaming state is stored. In the present embodiment, the game state after the big hit is switched by setting the data corresponding to the game state in the state setting area 203u based on the data stored in the state setting area 203m after the big hit after the big hit game. Set. Further, in the time-saving game state, when the time-saving number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) is executed, the data corresponding to the normal game state is set in the state setting area 203u, so that the game state is changed. It shifts from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. In the initialized state, data corresponding to the normal gaming state is set.

The abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game by the correct game method according to the current game state.

It is correct to execute the right-handed game in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (except during the jackpot game). In this case, the lottery is usually executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but during the period when the game is executed only with the second special symbol, the game is illegally played. There is a risk of playing a game. Therefore, this abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. As will be described later, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, the abnormality monitoring counter (not shown) measures the period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is continuously set to ON for a predetermined time (in the present embodiment). , 20 seconds) or more, an abnormality notification (displaying a voice and a warning image) is executed.

Also, in the normal game state, the correct game method is to play with a left-handed hit, but when the game ball enters the normal symbol start port 67, which should only be entered with a right-handed hit, the normal symbol fluctuates. When it is determined, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to on, and the abnormality notification is executed.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

In this way, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 and a holding ball is generated, each of the holding balls in the order of formation of the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 is formed. Various determination data of the reserved ball is stored. Therefore, since the winning command is generated based on the rearrangement holding storage area 203u, the voice lamp control device 113 establishes a hold in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined based on the winning command. It is possible to generate a command to be output to the display control device 114 so as to display the reserved symbols in order. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order in which the hold is established by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also determined and stored in relation to the establishment order, the winning command is generated based on the variable display start order, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also receives the command. Based on the winning command, the order in which each hold is established and the actual order in which the variable display is started can be determined.

In addition, since the fluctuation start time of each hold is stored in each hold area and the time is managed (updated according to the passage of time), the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored hold data can be easily performed. It can be determined.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display unit 88, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving a solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (a variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a vibration sensor 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it displays in the order of winning displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The voice output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed so that the reserved symbol display being displayed is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order.

A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning a prize in the winning opening is an important factor in determining the game state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent the winning opening from being intentionally won. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 has been vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113>
Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 19. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least the variation pattern selection table 222a and the addition time selection table 222b are set in the ROM 222.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The variation pattern selection table 222a has a plurality of types of variation contents (for example, variation) corresponding to the variation time and the rough variation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of different display contents from reach A to D, which are composed of the same time and the same determination result.

The addition time selection table 222b is for determining the addition time of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the addition time (the extended display time shown in FIG. 5B) with respect to the remaining time of the probability variation period. It is a data table. In the addition time selection table 222b, the addition time is set corresponding to each addition time. The maximum time for the addition time is the period until the variable display that becomes the jackpot B is started. If the selected addition time exceeds the maximum time, it is set in the addition time selection table 222b. It is controlled so that the larger value within the maximum time is selected from the added times.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes the jackpot B starts is set, but the time until the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes the jackpot B stops is the maximum time. It may be configured to be configured as.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d1, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1, a secondary special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2, and a second special symbol. Hold ball number counter 223d1, slave special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2, slave special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e, slave special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f, effect counter 223g, slave state setting area 223h, probability variation upper limit storage area 223i, At least a probability variation period storage area 223j, a subordinate sort hold storage area 223k, an update stop flag 223m, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The outer 1 special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is the first special performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a variable display (dynamic display) of a symbol, and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to (FIG. 46, S1502). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1612).

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to (FIG. 46, S1505). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1617).

The secondary special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (). FIG. 46, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

The secondary special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is a flag indicating the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p in the main control device 110. Thereby, the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 can be discriminated by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1 is the second special performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a variable display (dynamic display) of a symbol, and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

The second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 46). , S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

The secondary special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is a flag indicating the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q in the main control device 110. Thereby, the fluctuation state of the special figure 2 can be discriminated by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

The secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. It should be noted that each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

In the slave state setting area 223h, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is a storage area in which the time until the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot B of the first special symbol is started is stored. If the reserved ball that is the jackpot B is not stored in the reserved ball of the first special symbol, the time until the last reserved ball of the stored reserved ball of the first special symbol is changed is completed. It is stored in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k has the same data as the sort hold storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. Is a storage area stored based on a winning command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k. The subordinate sort hold storage area 223k stores the hold area of the hold data from the hold area 1 to the hold area 8 and various data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81. It is composed of a storage area for data during variable display. Each holding area has a hit / fail judgment result storage area 223k1, a jackpot type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a read-ahead probability variation flag storage area 223k6, and a sort flag 223k7. Is stored in the corresponding hold area, and each data extracted from the received winning command is stored in the corresponding holding area. Further, every time a display variation pattern command for starting the variation display of a special symbol is generated, the data of the hold area of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is shifted to the previous hold area and stored. The hold data in the hold area 1 is stored in the storage area of the changing data of the first special symbol in the case of the first special symbol, and in the case of the second special symbol, the changing data of the second special symbol. Each is shifted to the storage area and stored.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), the hit / fail determination result storage area 223k1 has the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of preliminarily determining the validity of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in is extracted from the received winning command and stored. The information on the winning / failing judgment result extracted from the winning command is the winning / failing judgment result storage area of any of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holdings (corresponding holding area of the rearranged holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110). It is stored in 223k1.

The jackpot type storage area 223k2 is set in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), the variation pattern type storage area 223k3 has the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on various data stored in is extracted from the received winning command and stored. This fluctuation pattern is data that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the fluctuation pattern, and the data in the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data to identify whether it is the data of.

The variable order storage area 223k4 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). It is a storage area in which the actual variation display start order in the determined hold areas 1 to 8 is extracted from the received winning command based on various stored data and stored.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), the variation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It is a storage area in which the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 calculated based on various data stored in is actually started to be variable display is extracted from the received winning command and stored. .. When the variable display start time is stored in the hold area, it is updated at any time in the hold number display process (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. To.

In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated data in the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start the variable display, but the command is not limited to this and is until the variable starts. Each counter value for calculating the time (for example, the type of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol during fluctuation (number of interrupts, etc.)) and the fluctuation display start. It may be a command corresponding to the time until it becomes.

The pre-reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to on and stored when the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 223k2 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

The sort flag 223k7 indicates that the player has requested the rearrangement of the hold symbol display by operating the frame button 22 (the hold symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated). It is a flag.

In this way, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63a and a holding ball is generated, the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are based on the data extracted from the winning command. Various determination data of each holding ball are stored according to the formation order of the holding balls including the above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 displays the hold symbol in the order in which the hold is established by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the data of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k. A command to output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order in which the hold is established by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, based on the winning command, the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is updated with the data synchronized with the sort hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110, and the hold data is changed (new hold is established, etc.). However, the data can be sequentially updated in synchronization.

The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). It has a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided with. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores each data in the sort hold storage area 203u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, the backed up data of the sort hold storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and the corresponding hold areas of the sort hold storage area 203u or changing. It is stored in the data storage area.

Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), the backed up data is read and stored based on the sort hold storage area 203u in the same manner as the winning command generated in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S939). By generating all the winning commands and outputting them to the voice lamp control device 113, the data synchronized with the same sort hold storage area 203u is set in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k.

Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data of the rearranged hold storage area 203u and the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k can be stored even when recovering from a power failure. The configuration for synchronization has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 backs up each data of the slave sorting hold storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs. Of course, it may be configured to be stored as.

In the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) is pressed when the power is turned on (power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects the winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and executes control processing such as various lottery such as selection of a winning or fluctuating pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, the lottery for whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting as in the present embodiment is sub-controlled. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by performing the operation by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control board of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is covered with a box called a board box, which is composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or By doing so, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an opening mark, such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. ..

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

In the following, the MPU 231 and the ROM 234 and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. Further, the ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

When a game ball enters the distribution device 630, is distributed by the passive distribution member 640, and the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired and acquired. After the lottery and the fluctuation pattern and the like are determined based on each of the counter values, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Variable display (dynamic display). Further, when a game ball enters the sorting device 630 during the variation display of the first special symbol, the game ball is sorted by the passive sorting device 640 and wins a prize in the second starting port 63b. When the game ball wins the second starting port 63b, each counter value (C1 to C3) is displayed for the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery game machine, as in the case where the first starting port 63a is won. And CS1) are acquired, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured to enable variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, among the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the 7-segment LED on the left side executes the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the 7 on the right side. In the segment LED, the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed in the left display area Dm1, and the second special is executed in the right display area Dm2. The variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. ..

When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 63a while the first special symbol is variablely displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winning is obtained. ), Since the first lottery game for displaying the lottery result in a variable manner cannot be executed immediately, each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, an embodiment (for example, one) indicating a holding number “1” of the first special symbol of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The light emitting diode is lit in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is updated (the number of reserved balls is added by 1).

When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. In the winning command, it is possible to identify which of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b is won, and the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) can be identified.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the holding information such as the number of holdings and the information about the winning start port from the received command, and based on the holding information, the third symbol display device. A process of displaying the reserved symbol in the corresponding reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds in 81 is executed. As shown in FIG. 5B, the reserved symbol is "○" if it is a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved information of the first special symbol (first starting port 63a), and the second special symbol (second starting). If it is a hold symbol corresponding to the hold information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each hold information (one hold symbol for each hold).

Similarly, when the second special symbol is variable-displayed (the remaining variable time is set), when a game ball wins in the second starting port 63b, each counter value is acquired, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area is obtained. It is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is updated. Then, the hold symbol indicating that the hold information is stored is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the game balls that have won the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined. One example shown in FIG. 18 will be specifically described. This means that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol has a fluctuation time of 10 s remaining, and the second special symbol has a fluctuation time of 5 s remaining. Shown. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol "holding information" indicating that the reserved symbol display area Ds1 is the holding information of the second special symbol (holding information based on the winning of the second starting port 63b). "●" indicates that the reserved symbol display area Ds2 is the reserved information of the first special symbol. The reserved symbol "○" indicates that the reserved symbol display area Ds3 is the reserved information of the second special symbol. “●” indicates that the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is the reserved information of the first special symbol, and the reserved symbol “◯” is displayed. In this case, it is shown that the order in which the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are won is in the order of the reserved symbol display area Ds1 and the reserved symbol display area Ds4 in the order of earliest.

That is, after the game ball wins in the second starting port 63b, the game ball wins in the first starting port 63a, then in the second starting port 63b, and then in the first starting port 63a. It shows that it was done.

As shown in FIG. 18, in each hold data, the change time of the change pattern selected when the hold starts to change is predicted and stored in advance (the type of change pattern to be determined is stored). Has been). Then, since the hold of the second special symbol is stored in the first prize order (corresponding to the hold area 1 in the sort hold storage area 203u), the rest of the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation time (5s) elapses, the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds later. Further, since the hold of the first special symbol is stored in the second prize order (corresponding to the hold area 2 in the sort hold storage area 203u), the rest of the first special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation time (10s) elapses, the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds later. Next, since the hold of the second special symbol is stored in the third prize order (corresponding to the hold area 3 in the sort hold storage area 203u), the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner When the fluctuation time (40s) of the reserved data stored first in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (5s), the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since it is the hold of the first special symbol that is stored in the fourth prize order (corresponding to the hold area 4 in the sort hold storage area 203u), the first special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner When the fluctuation time (10s) of the reserved data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10s), the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 20 seconds later.

In this way, in the sort hold storage area 203u, the variable display start times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are calculated in the order of establishment, and the variable display start time is calculated in the order of earliest based on the variable display start time. And the variable display order is assigned.

When the player operates the frame button 22 at this timing, the reserved symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 holds the first special symbol, which is the fourth in the winning order, as shown in the rearranged display mode shown in FIG. The symbol display is rearranged from the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol in the winning order (the fourth reserved symbol display in the winning order is interrupted before the reserved symbol display in the third winning order).

FIG. 19 shows that the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 25) when the game ball wins the first start port 63a 1 s after the state of FIG. 27, S914) is a diagram schematically showing a process of determining the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved symbols.

Since FIG. 19 shows a state after 1 s from FIG. 18, the first special symbol in the variable display has a remaining fluctuation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining fluctuation time of 4 s. In addition, the fluctuation start time of each hold area of the sort hold storage area 203u is also updated.

The newly established first start port 63a (first special symbol) is held in the fifth winning order, and in the sort hold storage area 203u, each data is stored in the hold area 5. First, the same as the newly memorized first special symbol, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the variable display and the holding fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the winning orders 2 and 4, are newly added. The time for the hold of the first special symbol that has been established (stored) to start the variable display is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 19, the order after sorting (variation display start order) is rearranged in the order in which the variation display starts, based on the variation display start time of each holding area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 to request the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the rearranged display mode of FIG. 19, the fourth and fifth reserved symbols are displayed in the winning order. Is rearranged from the 3rd reserved symbol display in the winning order (the 4th and 5th reserved symbol display in the winning order is interrupted before the 3rd reserved symbol display in the winning order).

In this way, each time a hold occurs, the variation display start time is calculated and the sort order is determined, so that the player can perform an operation for requesting the sort (operation of the frame button 22). In that case, it is possible to promptly display the reserved symbol display after sorting.

Further, the fluctuation patterns of the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot tend to be longer than the fluctuation patterns selected when the fluctuation time is off. As shown in FIG. 19, the first hold in the winning order has a long fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Therefore, the hold of the same second special symbol that was established after that has a later variation display start time than the hold of the first special symbol that was established later, and when rearranged, a longer variation time is selected. Behind the pending symbol display, the types (differences between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) different from the reserved symbol whose long fluctuation time is selected are collectively displayed. Therefore, the larger the number of reserved symbol displays that are displayed by interrupting the reserved symbol display area that follows the reserved symbol display, the more the player has the expectation of a big hit for the previous reserved symbol display. Sorting can be done with the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the interest in the game increases, and the game can be continued without getting tired of it.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 20 to 43. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (FIG. 40) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (FIG. 41, S1250) that is executed after the start-up process, and periodically (the present embodiment). Then, there are a timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) that is activated (at a cycle of 2 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 39) that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the start-up process (FIG. 40) and the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) will be described.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) and the main process (FIG. 41, S1250), a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes and is provided in the RAM 203. It is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for sending commands. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 21, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a has elapsed, or the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a. Determines if a specified number of prizes have been won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding counter buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (399, respectively in the present embodiment). When it reaches 99, 100, 198, 239), it clears to 0 respectively. When the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C4, and the initial value is set in the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Then, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 30.

After the start winning process (S108) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S109), which is the variation process of the normal symbol for the game ball passing through the normal symbol start port 67, is executed (S109), and then the normal symbol start port 67 is executed. (S110), a through-gate process is executed for the passage of the game ball. The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, and the details of the through gate processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. The launch control process for executing the control related to the launch of the game ball is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process (S111) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a special symbol variation process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S107). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 21, S107) makes various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and displays the determined variation by predetermined control. In some embodiments, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control variable display, or stop display in a display mode indicating a determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 21, S107) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 21, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 23, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game. And the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display when the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the jackpot and the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed. Is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variation display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start processing is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for restarting the variation display is executed, while the temporary stop is performed. If not, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the fluctuation pattern selection process based on the hold data are executed. ..

After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIGS. 29, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204), the fluctuation of the regulation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display When time has passed, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the judgment result of the second lottery game and the variable display of the first special symbol with the symbol showing the jackpot are stopped, and the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed. If so, the process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol during the variable display is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in the variation (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start processing is executed (S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), when the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is executed, but if it is not temporarily stopped, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the process is executed. The jackpot judgment and the selection process of the fluctuation pattern based on the pending data are executed. After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S203).

In the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 22, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S303). .. A process is performed in which the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305) will be described in detail later, but the game is set based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state (during probabilistic change) (S402). The determination of whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state is executed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag (not shown) is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag is on (that is, the game state is the probability change game state (during probability change)) (S402: Yes), a special hit is made based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. Whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value is determined, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not during probability variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (Fig. 10 (b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

It is determined whether the jackpot flag 203o is on (S405). Here, when the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, by using this jackpot flag 203o in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation that becomes a jackpot is not executed at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that big hits are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large.

In S405, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is off, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot has not started in the second special symbol (S405: No), the processing of S403 or S404 is performed. It is determined whether the executed lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203o is set to on (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type (S409). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is on in the processing of S405 (S405: Yes), or when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order in the processing of S406 (S406: No), the first 1 A symbol indicating the deviation of the first special symbol is set in the special symbol display device 37 (S410).

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special symbol jackpot random number C1 actually acquired is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203o is already set to on, that is, by the second special symbol. When the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is started, the setting of the deviation is forcibly executed by the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuations that become big hits are not executed at the same time, and the fluctuations that become big hits are continuously started in a short period of time, and the game store side. It is possible to suppress the problem that the damage becomes excessive.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be executed at the same time. In this case, a dedicated jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, in the fluctuation of one special symbol, the measurement of the fluctuation time is temporarily stopped, and the special symbol is simulated. , It is conceivable to configure it to temporarily stop.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). The determination of whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether or not the big hit is set in the process of S408. Here, it is configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is a big hit by setting a dedicated flag (not shown) to on.

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (either the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state, or the time-saving gaming state) is set. The variation pattern selection table 202d in which the hit / fail determination result of the corresponding first special symbol is a big hit is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired from the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10B) (S503). After that, the process of S505 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol is set to be out of alignment (S501: No), the lottery result of the first special symbol according to the gaming state is out of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Is set (S504). After that, the process of S505 is executed.

In the process of S505, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the set fluctuation pattern selection table 202d based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S505). A special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is generated (set) (S506). A counter value is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S507). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 21, S107), will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204), first, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S601). When it is determined that the first fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (S601: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is subtracted and updated (S601: No). S602). It is determined whether the value of the updated special 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0, that is, whether it is the fluctuation end timing of the first special symbol (S603). If it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (S603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S603, when it is determined that the fluctuation time end timing is reached (S603: Yes), it is determined whether or not a jackpot is set for the first special symbol being changed (S604). When it is determined that a jackpot is set for the first special symbol (S604: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q for setting the temporary stop of the second special symbol is set to ON. (S605). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q is set is set (S606), and then the start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S607). After that, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, in the processing of S604, when it is determined that the first special symbol that is changing is set to be out of alignment (S604: No), it is determined whether the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (S608). .. When it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S608: Yes), the time saving counter 203k is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (S609). After that, the process proceeds to S610. On the other hand, in the process of S608, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S610.

In the process of S610, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing to confirm and stop the main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S610). The fluctuation stop of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S611). The time saving counter 203k is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S612). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (S613), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set. A special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating that it is off is set (S614). After that, this process ends.

With this configuration, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the big hit game is started, the second special symbol can be set to be temporarily stopped. After that, after the jackpot game is completed, the remaining fluctuation time can be resumed for the second special symbol that is changing. Therefore, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, when one special symbol is a big hit, the other one that is changing is temporarily stopped and waits until the big hit game is completed. This allows the player to concentrate on the jackpot game.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S206).

In the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 26, S206), the number of first special symbol hold balls in each process from S301 to S306 is compared with the above-mentioned first special symbol change start process (FIGS. 22 and S203). The counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) In each process from S701 to S710, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol jackpot determination process. (S705) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) are the same except that they are changed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27, S705), in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), in contrast to the process of S401, the first special symbol hold ball execution area In the processing of S801, 203c is in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, and in contrast to the processing of S408, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is in the special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the processing of S808. , S409 and S410 are the same as the processing of S809 and S810 except that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S706), the special figure 1 lottery result (first) is obtained with respect to the process of S501 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) described above. In the process in which the special symbol lottery result) is S901, the special figure 2 lottery result (second special symbol lottery result) is added to the special figure 1 variation pattern command (first special symbol) for each process from S506 to S507. The variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r are the same except that they are changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s for each process of S906 to S907. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 21, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 29, S207), the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag of each process from S601 to S602 is opposed to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204) described above. 203p, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s in each process from S1001 to S1002, and in the process of S603, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is changed. Although it is determined whether the time is the end timing, in the process of S1003, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the end timing, and for each process from S604 to S607 and S610 to S611. The special figure 1 (first special symbol), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command, the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the special figure 1 confirmation command are S1004 to S1005, S1009 to S1010. , Special figure 2 (2nd special symbol), special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop command, start of jackpot of 2nd special symbol, special figure 2 confirmation command except that they are changed respectively. Since they are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In addition, since the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, the player can note that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display has not disappeared. You can grasp it and play a big hit game with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S108). The start winning process (FIGS. 30, S108) determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, and if a winning ball is won, the upper limit number of holdings (first starting port 64, first). This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, up to a maximum of four in each of the two starting ports 640). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Alternatively, a process of predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) will be described.

In the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64 (starting winning) (S1101). Here, the winning of the first starting port 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64 (there was a starting prize) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved pieces is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (1104). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1105). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the special hit random number in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c of the RAM 203 is read (acquired). It is held (stored) in the counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the variable type counter storage area 203c4, respectively (S1106).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) will be described in detail later, but the first special in which the variation display start order based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored. The number of the symbol and the second special symbol is determined in advance, and the hit / fail judgment result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, etc. are further determined from the fluctuation display order and each memorized counter value. Is executed.

Next, for each process from S1108 to S1114, the same process as the process performed for winning the game ball to the first starting port 64 executed in each process from S110 to S1107 is performed. Since the only difference is that the process is executed for the start port 640, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first look-ahead process (S1107), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 20, S108), will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1107).

In the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 31, S1107), first, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the fluctuations, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. Each value of the type counter CS1 is read out (S1121). The read data is rearranged. Among the vacant storage areas of the hold storage area 203t, the winning order is stored in the smallest area, and the variable display based on the newly stored hold data (each counter value) is started. The variable display start time is calculated (S1122).

As shown in FIG. 18, the fluctuation start time is the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the variation display corresponding to the newly stored reserved data (if the reserved data is based on the first starting port 64, the first special symbol and the second symbol). If the data is on hold based on the start port 640, the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol) and each hold data previously stored based on the same start ports 64 and 640 as the newly stored hold data are determined. It is calculated by adding each of the fluctuation times.

Here, each of the reserved data stored earlier based on the same start port as the newly stored hold data is the first if the newly stored hold data is the hold data based on the first start port 64. If the reserved data based on the first starting port 64 (corresponding to the first special symbol) stored in, while the newly stored reserved data is the reserved data based on the second starting port 640, it is stored first. It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 640.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the order after sorting is renumbered in ascending order of the variable display start time of all the reserved data stored in the sort hold storage area 203t (S1123). Here, regarding the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, all the reserved data are renumbered, but the renumbering is not limited to this, and when the variable display start order is switched from the previous time, that is, , When the variable display start order of newly stored pending data is interrupted by the variable display start order of the reserved data stored earlier, it is natural to configure so that only the changed order is renumbered. Good.

It is determined whether the gaming state at the time when the newly stored reserved data starts to fluctuate is the high-probability gaming state (S1124). Regarding the game state when the fluctuation starts, there is a thing that the newly stored hold data stops by the time when the fluctuation starts, but the look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 is on, and after that, there is a hold that stops at the 15R normal jackpot. It is determined by determining whether or not it is present. When it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the newly stored reserved data starts to fluctuate is the high-probability gaming state (S1124: Yes), the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high-probability time Based on the above, the validity of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding sort hold storage area 203t (S1125). On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state when the newly stored reserved data starts to fluctuate is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S1124: No), the special symbol jackpot for the low-probability time Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, the hit / fail of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding sort hold storage area 203t (S1127).

The first look-ahead update process is executed (S1127). The first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127) will be described in detail later, but the result of determining whether the hold data (various counter values) stored in the sort hold storage area 203t is correct or not in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Based on, the jackpot type (whether or not it is probable) and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) are stored (updated).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first look-ahead update process (S1127), which is one process of the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead update process (S1127).

In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127), first, it is determined whether the hit / fail determination result predicted by the process of S1125 or S1127 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) is a big hit (S1131). If it is determined that the hit / fail judgment result predicted by the process of S1125 or S127 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) was a jackpot (S1131: Yes), was the predicted jackpot A or jackpot C? It is determined (S1132). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot C (S1132: Yes), the look-ahead probability variation flag 203t6 of the sort hold storage area 203t corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to on. (S1133). The look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 is set to off when the data is shifted to the higher holding area and stored, since the data in the holding area before the shift is cleared to 0. That is, the look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 once set to on is set to off by shifting the hold area in order and overwriting (clearing 0) the next new data in the changing data storage area. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not jackpot A or jackpot C (S1132: No), the process of S1134 is executed.

From the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state (whether or not it is probable variation or time saving) at the start of variation display, variation display starts based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data. A variation pattern that is sometimes determined is predicted (S1134).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit / fail judgment result predicted by the process of S1125 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) is incorrect (S1131: No), the gaming state (probability change or time reduction) at the start of the variation display From the fluctuation pattern table 202e corresponding to (whether or not it is inside), the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the newly stored reserved data (S1135). ..

The predicted hit / fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern are stored in the area corresponding to the winning order of the rearranged hold storage area 203t (corresponding to the newly stored hold data) (S1136). The variable display start order of the reserved data newly stored in the sort hold storage area 203t is determined by interrupting (changing the order) with the previously stored variable display start order (S1137). .. When it is determined that the variable display start order of the reserved data newly stored in the sort hold storage area 203t is stored by interrupting (changing the order) the previously stored variable display start order. (S1137: Yes), About the reserved data after the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data (the reserved data in the order in which the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored reserved data stops changing and then starts changing) , Again, predict and update the hit / fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern (S1138). Based on the pass / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, winning order, fluctuation display start order, and look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 corresponding to all the hold data stored in the sort hold storage area 203t, each data is stored in the voice lamp control device. A winning command for notifying 113 is generated for each pending data (S1139).

In this way, when the game ball wins the first start port 64 or the second start port 640 and is held until the corresponding special symbol can start the variable display, the hit / fail judgment or selection is made before the start of the variable display. The fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation start order in the hold is also calculated. Therefore, when the reserved symbol display is displayed, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of the start of fluctuation by the operation of the player.

Further, when a new hold is stored and the change start order is changed by the hold (the change start order of the newly stored hold is interrupted and stored), the sort hold storage area 203t is used again. Of each stored hold area, for a hold that starts to fluctuate after the newly stored hold is stopped, the hit / fail judgment, stop type, and fluctuation pattern are updated, so that the hold is newly stored. As a result, even when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation (whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state) changes, accurate data can be updated.

In the present embodiment, when the newly stored change start order of the hold is interrupted and stored, the hold data (hit / fail judgment, stop type, change pattern) of the hold area is updated again. Not limited to this, when a new hold is stored, the determination may be made again for all the hold areas each time. With this configuration, the data in the hold area can be updated each time a new hold is stored, and more accurate data can always be configured.

Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108), will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this second look-ahead process (S1114).

The second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114) pre-reads and stores the reserved data based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) winning a prize in the first start port 64. Fluctuation of pending data While this is a process of determining the display start order and making various judgments, the pending data based on winning a prize at the second starting port 640 is pre-read in advance and stored. Since the same process is executed only in that it is a process of determining the variation display start order of the above and performing various determinations, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as for the second look-ahead update process (S1147), which is one of the second look-ahead processes (FIG. 33, S1114) shown in FIG. 34, the above-mentioned first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127) is the first. Fluctuations in pending data based on winning in 1 start port 64 While this is a process of predicting various selection data based on the display start order and generating a winning command, the second start port 640 won a prize. The same process is executed except that the process is to predict various selection data and generate a winning command based on the variable display start order of the pending data based on the above, so detailed explanation is omitted. To do.

In this way, the game ball wins in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When this is done (holding data is stored), the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114) is executed. The newly stored hold data is stored in the hold ball storage area 203t in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114) in which the order in which the variable display starts is sorted first. Since it is determined by comparing with the variable display start time of each reserved data, it is possible to accurately determine the game state (whether or not the probability is changing) when the stored reserved data is started to be variablely displayed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the hit / fail determination result, the stop type, the variation pattern to be displayed, and the like. Therefore, next, even when the reserved data is newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second Based on the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of each reserved data predicted in the look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114), the fluctuation display start time of the newly stored reserved data can be accurately predicted. As a result, the correct variation display start order can be predicted.

In addition, when the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data interrupts the variable display start order of the previously stored reserved data (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold is stored. For each hold data in the variation display start order after the data, the game state at the start of the variation display is predicted again by the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). Therefore, since the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (look-ahead), the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored pending data from the winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a normal symbol variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (FIG. 35, S109), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit. (S1161). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display unit 88 to the middle of the opening / closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 640a. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1161: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1161: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display unit 88 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1162). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1162: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed (S1162: Yes). S1163). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S1184 and the processing of S1185, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display mounting unit 88.

In the process of S1163, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1163: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1163, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1163: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display unit 88 is set (S1164). .. In the process of S1164, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S1178, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display unit 88 as the second symbol. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S1177, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display unit 88 as the second symbol. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S1164, the variation display in the second symbol display unit 88 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1177 and the process of S1178. 2 A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display unit 88.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1165). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1165: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set (1166). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1165: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1162, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1162: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S1167).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1168). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1168: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203 g is not 0 (S1168: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203 g is subtracted by 1 (S1169).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1170). In the process of S1170, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203h is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i is acquired (S1171).

Next, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1172). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not in the time reduction) (S1172: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per normal symbol (FIG. 10 (d)) for low probability time. Based on the above, the hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1173). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is not 0 (that is, the time reduction is in progress) (S1172: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (that is, the time reduction is in progress). S1174). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1174: Yes), the process of S1173 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1174: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per ordinary symbol (FIG. 10 (d)) for high probability is used. Based on this, the hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1175).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1176). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is a miss) (S1176: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of the miss is set. (S1177). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined to be a hit (that is, a hit) (S1176: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of hit, is displayed. It is set (S1178).

It is determined whether the gaming state is in the time-saving gaming state (including the probabilistic gaming state)) (S1179). If it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (S1179: Yes), the process of S1181 is executed. If it is determined that the time-saving game is not in progress (S1179: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1180). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot, the process of S1181 is executed.

In the process of S1181, the opening time of the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set to 1 s, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1181). On the other hand, in the processing of S1180, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (that is, it is in a low probability gaming state) (S1180: No), the ordinary electric accessory 640a The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1182).

It is determined whether the gaming state is in the time-saving gaming state (including the probabilistic gaming state)) (S1183). When it is determined that the time is being shortened (S1183: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3s (S1184). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1183: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1185). After the processes of S1184 and S1185 are executed, this process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S110). This through gate passage process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, and when the game ball has passed. , This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 36, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (gate) 67 (S1191). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (S1191: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g is acquired (S1192). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1193).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (gate) 67 (S1191: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 g is If it is not less than 4 (S1193: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 (S1191: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1193: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter. The value (M) of 203 g is added by 1 (S1194). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt processing described above and the first normal symbol flag are set to the free hold area (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the hold 4) (S1195). In the process of S1195, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203 g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol hold 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether or not the player is performing a correct game corresponding to the game state is executed. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), the game is performed by a striking method (hereinafter, left-handed) in which the gaming ball is launched with the strength that the gaming ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Is the regular game method, and during the jackpot game, the time-saving game state, and the probability change game state, the game ball is launched with the strength that the game ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, right-handed hit). ) Is the regular game method. In the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 640a blocks the second starting port 640, and the winning rate for the first starting port 64 on the right side is lower than that of the first starting port 64 on the left side. Since it is set, it is disadvantageous for the player to hit right in the normal game state. Therefore, by monitoring whether or not the player is playing in the correct way, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage to the player. In addition, it is possible to monitor the illegal right-handed hit to win the second starting port 640, and the damage caused by the illegality can be reduced.

In the fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 37, S111), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot game (S1201). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1201: No), it is determined whether the game is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (S1202). When it is determined that the probabilistic gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is in progress (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol has stopped fluctuating (S1203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is not changing (S1203), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204). After that, this process ends. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game by the correct game method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the game state. As will be described later, when the time for which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to be ON exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds or more), an abnormality notification command is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the abnormality by the command. (The third symbol display device 81 is executed with a character indicating that it is abnormal (for example, a character display (for example, right-handed) suggesting the correct game method) is executed, and an error sound or an instruction sound for the correct game is emitted by voice. It is output and an abnormal signal is output to the hall computer))) is executed.

In this way, in the probabilistic game state or the time saving state, in the correct game method, the right-handed game is performed and the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. 1 If the special symbol is not displayed in a fluctuating manner for a certain period of time, it is possible to monitor whether or not an illegal game is performed so that the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player by notifying the abnormality, is not displayed in a fluctuating manner. it can. Therefore, fraud can be detected at an early stage, and damage to the amusement store can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1201: Yes), in S1203, when it is determined that the first special symbol is changing (S1203: No), abnormality monitoring is performed. Flag 203v is set to off (S1205).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1202 that the game is not in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (S1202: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1206). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is in progress (S1206: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

In this way, when the normal symbol that can be changed only in the right-handed game is displayed in a variable manner in the normal game state in which the right-handed game is not executed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. An abnormality alarm command is set when 20 seconds have passed while the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, but after a big hit game, a time-saving game, or a probability change game is completed, a holding ball with a normal symbol (maximum 4 balls) is set. ) Is stored, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner even after shifting to the left-handed state, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, but in that case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is Since it is 3 seconds, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to off before the abnormality alarm command is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormality notification is executed even though the game is played by the correct game method.

On the other hand, in the process of S1206, when it is determined that the normal symbol is stopped (S1206: No), it is determined whether the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S1207). When it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S1207: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

In this way, when the game state is not a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state, that is, a normal game state, it is a normal game method to play a game by hitting left, but a variable display is displayed when hitting right. If the second special symbol that can be made is changing, it means that the game is being played by the wrong game method. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203v to ON, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON for a predetermined time (20 seconds in this embodiment) or more, the abnormality notification is executed, so that an illegal game is played. Can be detected earlier. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage to the amusement store due to fraud.

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, when it is determined that the second special symbol is stopped changing (S1207: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to off. After that, this process ends. In this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), the determination of whether the normal symbol, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol is stopped is a state in which the holding ball is not stored and the fluctuation is stopped. .. In the state where the reserved ball is stored, the temporary stopped state (the stopped state from the fluctuation stop to the start of the fluctuation by the next holding ball) is determined not to be in the fluctuation stop but to be in the fluctuation.

Here, when the game state is the normal game state and the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating, the game is performed by left-handed, which is the correct game method, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to off. It is avoided that the abnormality alarm command described later is set. Therefore, even if the player plays the game for a short time by the wrong game method without any ill will, the abnormality notification is not immediately performed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the abnormality notification.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the fraud monitoring process (S112), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 20) in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fraud monitoring process (S112). In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), the time when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to be turned on is timed, and when the time exceeds a predetermined time (20 seconds or more in this embodiment), an abnormality alarm command is set. The process is executed.

In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), first, it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211). When it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211: Yes), the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1212). It is determined whether or not the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 20 seconds) (S1213). If it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is less than the upper limit value (S1213: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1213: Yes), the abnormality alarm command is set (S1214). After that, this process ends.

This abnormality alarm command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Upon receiving this abnormality alarm command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 to output the mode of the abnormality alarm. As a result, fraud and defects can be detected at an early stage.

Further, by configuring the abnormality alarm command to be set when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is continuously set to the on for a predetermined time (20 seconds in the present embodiment) after the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to the on. Even if there is a period during which the game is not performed by the regular game method (for example, the period for switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state) for a short time (less than 20 seconds) when the game state is switched, immediately Since the abnormality alarm is not output, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined time is set to 20 seconds, but the predetermined time is not limited to 20 seconds, and the predetermined time is configured to be longer than the switching time required for normal gaming when switching the gaming state. Just do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormality alarm is erroneously output while the player is changing the game operation.

On the other hand, in the process of S1211, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is off (S1211: No), the process of resetting the abnormality monitoring counter 203w to 0, which is the initial value, is executed. After that, this process ends.

In this way, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is reset to the initial value, so that the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided, and the normal game method is used. It is possible to suppress the problem that an abnormality alarm is output even though the game is being played.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1221) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 40), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1231). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1232). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1233).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1234), and if it is turned on (S1234: Yes), the process shifts to S1240. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1234: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (1235), and if it is not stored. (S1235: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1110 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1235: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1236), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1237: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1240 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1240, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1240). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1241, S1242) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1241 and S1242) is executed.

Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1241, S1242) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1241 and S1242), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1241), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1242). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1243.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1234: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1235: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1237: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1238). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1239), and the process proceeds to S1243. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1243). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1244). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (S1250) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main process (S1250) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1250). In this main process (S1250), the counter update process and the power off time process are roughly classified.

In the main process (FIG. 41, S1250), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each of the sub-sides. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1251).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1252). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1253) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). This probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when the jackpot A or jackpot C is executed, the game ball enters the second specific entry port (not shown). When it is determined whether or not the ball has been hit and the ball is entered, a process of setting data indicating that the game state after the big hit game is set to the probabilistic game state is executed in the state setting area after the big hit.

When the probability change setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), the opening / closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display unit 88 is executed (S1258). Briefly, on condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display unit 88 is displayed. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process is shifted to S1251 and each process after S1251 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the initial time is reached within the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). The initial value of the random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1256, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1263 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1265), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1259 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1251 to S1258, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1251 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1301) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1251 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a probability variation setting process (S1254), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of this probability variation setting process (S1254).

In the probability variation setting process (FIG. 42, S1254), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot C is being executed (S1261). If it is determined that the jackpot A or jackpot C is not being executed (S1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot A or the jackpot C is being executed, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second specific entry port 650a (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific entry port 650a (S1262: Yes), the probability variation setting data is set in the jackpot post-hit state area 203m (S1263). After that, a ball entry notification command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the ball has entered the second specific ball entry port 650a is set. Here, in the jackpot post-hit state area 203m, the time-saving game state is set by default, and the data for setting the probabilistic game state when the game ball enters the second specific entry port 650a. Is rewritten to. When the probabilistic game state is set, the data is automatically rewritten to the default time-saving game state data.

As a result, when the game ball does not enter the second specific entry port 650a, the time saving game state is automatically set after the big hit game regardless of the big hit main, so that the control of the main control device 110 is performed. The load can be reduced.

Further, as will be described later, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ball entry notification command, the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 output a notification mode for notifying that the probability variation game state is given. Is controlled. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game state after the big hit game in an easy-to-understand manner.


Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (S1400) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1418 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 35 and S1415), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1418. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1418 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1418. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1418 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the data shifts to S1308.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is executed (see FIGS. 35 and S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is executed, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1418 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and then an interrupt is interrupted. The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, so that the process of S1308 was performed via the processes of S1304 to S1306. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1309, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that when the processing of S1308 is reached via the processing of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1400). When the main process (S1400) is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1400) was started or the previous process of S1401 was executed (S1400). S1401) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1411 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1410. In the process of S1401, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S1402 to S1410 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1411 and the command determination process of S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1401: Yes). S1402). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process (S1406), as will be described in detail later, a process of updating the hold symbol display display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k. ..

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the sortable period (the period during which the jackpot game is in progress and the state in which there is no hold), which will be described later, the hold symbol display displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts to change. It is sorted and displayed in order.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1408), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). After that, the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1411, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

After the variation display setting process (S1411), the temporary variation stop process is executed (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) is a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped from the main control device 110, or a temporary second fluctuation stop command indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is received, a process for temporarily stopping the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. The details of this provisional fluctuation stop processing (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

After the provisional fluctuation stop processing (S1412), the hold sorting processing is executed (S1413). This hold sorting process sorts and displays the hold symbol display from the winning order to the variable display start order based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, based on the player's button operation. Execute the process. The details of this hold sorting process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

After the hold sorting process (S1413), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control unit 110 is performed (S1414). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

When the processing of S1414 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1419), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to the process of S1401 and the main process (S1400) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S1400) is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1414). This command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110. To judge. The details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1501). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1501: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1505). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1504: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1507). When it is determined that the first or second stop type command has been received (S1507: Yes), the first stop type selection flag is set to on when the first stop type command is received. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to on. (S1508). The stop type (either 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223 m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Are identifiablely stored in each.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1510). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command is included. The value of the number counter f (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is the voice lamp. The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1 (S1511).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, every time there is a starting winning prize. , S1508, the values of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. 2 It can be adjusted to the value with the special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. Then, it can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), the information of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each hold area in the sorted hold storage area 203u extracted is the hit / fail judgment result, jackpot type, change pattern type, change display order, and time until the start of change display for each hold. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the provisional first fluctuation stop command or the provisional second fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515). When it is determined that the provisional first fluctuation stop command or the provisional second fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515: Yes), when the provisional first fluctuation stop command is received, the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set. When it is set to ON and a temporary second fluctuation stop command is received, the secondary fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1516).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the provisional first fluctuation stop command or the provisional second fluctuation stop command has not been received (S1515: No), the first special symbol fluctuation restart command or the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received. It is determined whether or not the command is performed (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol change restart command or the second special symbol change restart command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol change restart command corresponding to the received command is received. In this case, the slave first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to on. Further, when the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received, the slave second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol change resumption command or the second special symbol change resumption command has not been received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the hold quantity display update process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the pending quantity display update process (S1406). This hold quantity display update process (S1406) is a process for updating the hold symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each hold area of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k. ..

In the hold quantity display update process (FIG. 37, S1406), first, the change display start time of each hold area of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is updated (S1431). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the variable start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is turned on is the hold corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 is turned off in the variable display start order. As for the symbol display, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the order in which the hold is established (S1432).

Here, the sorting flag 223k7 is operated by the frame button 22 during the sorting possible period in the hold sorting process (FIGS. 40, S1413) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later (in this embodiment, the sorting flag 223k7). When pressed), it is set to on in all hold areas where hold data is stored. As a result, all the displayed reserved symbol displays are rearranged from the order in which the hold is established, based on the order in which the variable display of the hold is started. On the other hand, with respect to the newly stored hold after the sort flag 223k7 is set to on, since the sort flag 223k7 is off, the order is established without sorting, that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed at the end of the reserved symbol display displayed in.

Therefore, when the player wants to rearrange the reserved symbol display and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and then the reserved symbol display is rearranged. However, the sorted reserved symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the reserved symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurring) hold is displayed first in the established order. Since it is displayed at the end of the pending symbol display without interrupting it, the player can suppress the problem of confusing the current display in what order. Can be done.

Further, by rearranging only the reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated in this way, the variable display start order can be notified only when the player wants to know.

In addition, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is usually selected in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same start ports 63a and 63b as the hold that is the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the variable display start time is earlier for the hold with a later establishment order that occurs at the start ports 63a and 63b, which is different from the hold that is a big hit. In such a case, when the reserved symbols are rearranged, the reserved symbols with a later establishment order are displayed by interrupting the reserved symbols with an earlier establishment order (on the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side). To. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbols display, when the reserved symbols with a later formation order are displayed by interrupting before the reserved symbols with an earlier formation order, the player can display the reserved symbols. Among the reserved symbols displayed before the interrupted and displayed reserved symbols, the hold generated by winning a prize at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the interrupted and displayed reserved symbols may be a big hit. You can have expectations.

Therefore, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold symbol display, and can operate the frame button in the expectation that the order will change. , The frame button 22 can be operated with a feeling of expectation for a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variation display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1411). This variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot), a process of setting a display first or second stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type. To execute.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is off (S1601: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the process of S1606 is performed. To execute. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is on (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S1602).

In the process of S1603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (FIGS. 36 and S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S1603). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is subjected to the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81. The first special symbol (third symbol) is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed).

With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The value of the 1st special symbol hold ball count counter 223b1 is decremented by 1 according to (the display has been set), and the hold data stored in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is moved to the previous hold area. It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, hold area 1 → 1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol of variable display data, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3, hold The data in each area is shifted such as area 5 → hold area 4, hold area 6 → hold area 5, hold area 7 → hold area 6, hold area 8 → hold area 7. Using the secondary first fluctuation time storage area 223i, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is started (S1605).

It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1606: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off (S1607). In the process of S1506 of the command determination process (FIGS. 36 and S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, and the first 2 A variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is generated (S1608).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is subjected to the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command in the right display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81. The second special symbol (third symbol) is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). The value of the second special symbol hold ball count counter 223d1 is decremented by 1 according to (the display has been set), and the hold data stored in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is moved to the previous hold area. It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, hold area 1 → 1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol of variable display data, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3, hold The data in each area is shifted such as area 5 → hold area 4, hold area 6 → hold area 5, hold area 7 → hold area 6, hold area 8 → hold area 7.

Using the second variable time storage area 223j, the measurement of the variable time of the second special symbol is started (S1610).

It is determined whether the stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) of the secondary special figure 1 is set to ON (S1611). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag (not shown) and the second stop type selection flag (not shown) are not set on (that is, off) in the secondary special figure 1 (S1611: No). ), End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the secondary special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is on (S1611: Yes), the secondary special figure 1 stop type When the selection flag (not shown) is on, the secondary special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to off, and the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is on. If this is the case, the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to off (S1612).

In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or the second stop type command is set (S1613). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) is applied to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. The first stop type command for display is generated to notify (is there?). If the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 is notified of the stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) based on the stop type. A second stop type command for display is generated to notify (S1614). The first or second stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained, and is notified even when the determination result is incorrect. .. If the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time.

In addition, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control unit 110 by shifting the data in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k based on the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is not necessary to control the transmission of the main control device 110, and the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412) is one of the main processing (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, in the provisional fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in the fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81 becomes a big hit, and the fluctuation display of the other is displayed. During the jackpot game, a process for temporarily stopping is executed.

In the provisional fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is determined whether the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. When it is determined that the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to on (S1701: Yes), the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to off (S1702).

The first temporary stop command for display is generated (S1703). The display first temporary stop command is a command for controlling the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81. When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the display control device 114 causes the first special symbol (main symbol on the left, middle, and right) to be displayed by slightly shaking after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, the player is notified that the variable display is temporarily stopped. Further, by displaying the characters "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand, and the variable display is temporarily stopped. It is configured to notify.

In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol that was being displayed in a variable manner has been temporarily stopped due to a big hit, and the lottery that was being displayed in a variable manner disappears or becomes invalid. You can play the game with peace of mind by preventing you from becoming anxious if you do.

Further, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and may be a configuration in which the first special symbol is erased from the left display area Dm and the temporary stop is notified only by characters. However, other configurations may be used as a matter of course.

When the display first temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol measured in the slave first fluctuation time storage area 223i is interrupted (paused).

With this configuration, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is restarted, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), is the slave second fluctuation stop flag 223f set to on? It is determined (S1705). When it is determined that the secondary variable stop flag 223f is set to on (S1705: Yes), the secondary variable stop flag 223f is set to off (S1706), and the second temporary stop command for display is set. Is generated (S1707). Similar to the display first temporary stop command, the display second temporary stop command controls the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81. It is a command to do. Like the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of the temporary stop.

When the display second temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol measured in the secondary fluctuation time storage area 223j is interrupted (paused).

With this configuration, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is restarted, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

It is determined whether the slave first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). When it is determined that the slave first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to on (S1709: Yes), the slave first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to off (S1710).

It is determined whether the measured fluctuation time of the first special symbol stored in the slave first fluctuation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711). When it is determined that the remaining measured fluctuation time of the first special symbol stored in the slave first fluctuation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711: Yes), the first short fluctuation mode for display The restart command is set (S1712). When this display first short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first short variation mode restart command displays the characters "display the lottery result of the temporarily stopped variation display!" On the display control device 114 in the left display area Dm1 during the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the text "The lottery result of the fluctuation display that was temporarily stopped is displayed!" And continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured fluctuation time of the first special symbol stored in the slave first fluctuation time storage area 223i is longer than 3s (S1711: No), the first normal fluctuation mode for display is restarted. The command is set (S1713). When this display first normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first normal fluctuation mode restart command displays the characters "The temporarily stopped fluctuation display is changing!" In the left display area Dm1 for the remaining fluctuation time, and all of the first special symbols. After the main symbols (three symbols on the left, middle, and right) are displayed in a variable manner for the remaining fluctuation time, the first special symbol is displayed as a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110. Stop display. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the slave first fluctuation time storage area 223i is restarted (S1714).

With this configuration, the voice lamp control does not require the main control device 110 to perform processing for instructing the remaining fluctuation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining fluctuation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player overlooks it or the notification result cannot be understood because it is too short. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the notification result is displayed after notifying the player that the lottery result will be displayed immediately. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is displayed.

Further, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the interrupted fluctuation display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so that the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1 s). In addition, the player can recognize that the interrupted variation display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in fluctuation, so that the game is played. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the slave first fluctuation restart flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the slave second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to on (S1715). When it is determined that the slave second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to on (S1715: Yes), the slave second fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to off (S1716).

It is determined whether or not the remaining measured fluctuation time of the second special symbol stored in the second fluctuation time storage area 223j is 3s or less (S1717). When it is determined that the remaining measured fluctuation time of the second special symbol stored in the second fluctuation time storage area 223j is 3s or less (S1717: Yes), the second short fluctuation mode for display is used. The resume command is set (S1718). When this display second short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second short variation mode restart command displays the characters "display the lottery result of the temporarily stopped variation display!" On the display control device 114 in the right display area Dm2 for the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the text "The lottery result of the fluctuation display that was temporarily stopped is displayed!" And continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured fluctuation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary fluctuation time storage area 223j is longer than 3s (S1717: No), the second normal fluctuation mode for display is restarted. The command is set (S1719). When this display second normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second normal fluctuation mode restart command displays the characters "The temporarily stopped fluctuation display is changing!" In the right display area Dm2 for the remaining fluctuation time, and all of the second special symbols. After the main symbols (three symbols on the left, middle, and right) are displayed in a variable manner during the remaining fluctuation time, the second special symbol is displayed as a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110. Stop display. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the second variable time storage area 223j is restarted (S1720). On the other hand, when it is determined that the slave second fluctuation restart flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process is terminated.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control does not require the main control device 110 to perform processing for instructing the remaining fluctuation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining fluctuation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player overlooks it or the notification result cannot be understood because it is too short. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the notification result is displayed after notifying the player that the lottery result will be displayed immediately. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is displayed.

Further, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the interrupted fluctuation display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so that the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1 s). In addition, the player can recognize that the interrupted variation display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in fluctuation, so that the game is played. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the interrupted change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is resumed, the player is notified by characters to that effect, but the present invention is not particularly limited to this, and the voice is used. Or, of course, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, the interrupted variation is displayed as in a display mode (for example, displayed by an animation notifying that the character or the like has resumed the interrupted variation display) so that the player can know that the resume has been resumed. Of course, the notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to restarting the display. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the suspended variable display has been resumed.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select a fluctuation pattern according to the remaining fluctuation time. Not limited to this, when the main controller 110 restarts the temporarily stopped fluctuation table time, the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time or the fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time depends on the remaining fluctuation time. It may be configured to select a variation pattern. When a fluctuation pattern with a slightly shorter fluctuation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern with a slightly shorter fluctuation time so as to delay the fluctuation table time. , The fluctuation table time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be performed according to the remaining fluctuation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the hold sorting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this hold sorting process (S1413). This hold sorting process (FIG. 40, S1413) is one of the main processes (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, in the hold sorting process (FIGS. 40, S1413), when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid period, the hold symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order in which the hold is established. Executes the process of setting the display to be sorted in the variable display start order.

In the hold sorting process (FIG. 40, S1413), first, it is determined whether or not the sorting is possible period (S1801). During the sortable period, game states other than those during the jackpot game or in a state where there is no hold established at different start ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no hold of one or more of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are lined up. It is set to a replaceable period.

When it is determined that the sortable period is reached (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "may be rearranged !!" on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can operate the frame button 22. Notify the period of time. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be of course a configuration in which a dedicated lamp or the like is controlled to be turned on.

Further, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation is possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. Further, the sortable period may not be particularly provided, and the sort display may be executed if the sort is possible when the frame button 22 is operated.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the sort flag 223k7 of all the hold areas in which the hold data of the slave sort hold storage area 223k is stored is set to on. (S1804).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the sortable period is not available (S1801: No), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1803: No), the process ends.

With this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be rearranged.

The player can know the actual variation display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noted next (the special symbol that will be the variation display start). Therefore, the game can be played while assuming the display area to be seen in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

Further, in the configuration of this pachinko machine, the sorting device 630 makes it easy for the game ball to win the prize alternately between the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 64a, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are easily won. The game is played evenly, and the game can be played efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the rearrangement of the reserved symbols is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but is not limited to this, and is executed every time a new hold is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variation display start order by the reserved symbols sorted in the variation start order.

In the present embodiment, the sortable period is other than the state in which there is no hold established during the jackpot game or at different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is no hold of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Although it has been described as the game state of, not limited to this, the sortable period may be set even during the jackpot game, and conversely, the sortable period is the period during which a specific variable display mode is displayed. Others may be set, and it may be determined as appropriate.

When the jackpot game is set to the sortable period, it is necessary to perform sorting in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the reserved first special symbol or the second special symbol and the remaining fluctuation time during the temporary stop. Then, the sort order is determined, and the sort is performed based on the sort order. With this configuration, even if a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode and the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode is displayed are combined. , It is possible to sort in an accurate fluctuation start order and notify the player of the accurate fluctuation start order even during the jackpot game machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to store the rearranged data. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data (win / fail determination result, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern type, etc.) necessary for sorting by a winning command. The audio lamp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform sorting.

With this configuration, even if a power failure occurs, the main control device 110 backs up various data necessary for sorting to the RAM 203, and when the power is restored, the various types of data are used in the startup process (FIG. 32). By outputting the data to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily recover from the power failure by rearranging the data based on the various data.

In the present embodiment, depending on the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the fluctuation start and the fluctuation pattern type of the data stored in the rearranged hold storage area 203u, the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first special symbol held 2 The fluctuation start time of the special symbol was calculated, and the fluctuation start order was calculated. Not limited to that, at the time of winning a game ball, information (time information) as to whether or not the fluctuation mode is longer than a certain time is determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation mode is a reach, and the time information and the fluctuation are in progress. The fluctuation start order may be roughly determined from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol of No. 1 and rearranged. With this configuration, at the time of winning, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation mode is a reach (whether or not it is a long-term fluctuation mode or a short-time fluctuation mode), and the accurate fluctuation time (variation mode) can be determined. Even with the pachinko machine 10, which is determined based on information such as the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation, the player can be notified of the rough start order of fluctuation.

Therefore, although the player may not have an accurate fluctuation start order, the fact that the rearrangement has been performed is included in the long-term fluctuation mode (variation mode that becomes reach). , You can play the game with the expectation of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the sortable period is determined according to the game state, but is not limited to this, and it is determined whether or not the sort is possible (for example, a state in which the reserved symbol display is displayed). It may be configured to notify that sorting is possible. With this configuration, it is possible to flexibly set the period during which sorting is possible, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities to sort.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68. In the first embodiment described above, a configuration for switching the type of the variation pattern table 202d for acquiring the variation pattern of the special symbol depending on the game state has been described.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment, the type of the fluctuation pattern table 202d is changed and displayed a predetermined number of times when a small hit different from the big hit is won. Until then, it differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to switch to a specific variation pattern table.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
As for the electrical configuration in the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment. Specifically, the small hit random number table 202e (see FIG. 63 (a)) and the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)) have been added, and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d have been changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit random number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (a). FIG. 63A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202e. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination is made for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value, and if they do not match, the small hit random number table 202e It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value set in (see FIG. 63 (a)).

In the small hit random number table 202e, as shown in FIG. 63A, the number of small hit determination values is assigned differently for each of the normal game state and the probabilistic game state. In the normal game state, the determination value is not set. As a result, in the normal game state, the small hit determination value is not set, and the small hit is not won (determined) in the normal game state. Further, in the probabilistic game state, a value of "100 to 129" is set as a small hit determination value with respect to the value of the special hit random number counter C1. That is, in the probabilistic game state, if the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is any of "100 to 129", it is determined that the hit is a small hit. The determination value of the small hit is set to a value different from the determination value (“0 to 9” in the present embodiment) determined to be the big hit. Therefore, when it is determined that the hit is a miss (not a big hit), it is determined whether the hit is a small hit, and it is possible to add a difference in added value even in the miss.

As will be described later, when it is determined that a small hit is made, a 2R (round) small hit is executed in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a short time (1 second). The small hit is composed of a smaller number of game balls (prize balls) that the player can obtain as compared with the big hits (big hits A to C) (because the number of rounds is small and the opening time is short). In addition, the game state is not changed even after the small hit game. On the other hand, after the small hit game, it is easy to set the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in which a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected, so that the long fluctuation time of the first special symbol is easily selected.

Here, in the probabilistic game state, the lottery of the first special symbol is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the lottery of the second special symbol (the jackpot B is determined and the continuation of the probabilistic game state ends). Since it is set, the player expects to reduce the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) in the first special symbol as much as possible. Therefore, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, by winning a small hit, it is easy to select a first special symbol having a long fluctuation time, thereby giving the player an advantageous state. it can. Therefore, the player can feel advantageous even if the prize ball obtained is a small hit. As a result, it is possible to expect a small hit in addition to the big hit, and it is possible to suppress a problem of getting bored with the game early.

Next, the small hit selection table 202f stored in the RAM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit selection table 202f. The small hit selection table 202f is a data table for determining the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d to be transferred based on the value of the acquisition counter (not shown) acquired later when the small hit is won.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the small hit is configured to be determined only by the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic game state. When this small hit is won, the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong is out of order (probability change). Special Figure 1 The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is selected. (Hereinafter referred to as when a normal table is selected), any of the deviation (probability variation) special figures 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 (see FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c)) becomes the value of the transition counter. Determined based on.

In the small hit selection table 202d, when the normal table is selected, the transition counter deviates from "0 to 100" (probability variation) and the variation transition table 1 deviates from "101 to 150" (probability variation). However, the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation transition table 3 is set for each of "151 to 198". Further, the number of transitions is set in each of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3. The number of transitions is the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol from the setting of the table to the automatic switching to the detached (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)). ..

For example, in the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64 (a)), as shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)), 10 transitions are set as the number of transitions. Therefore, from the time the table is set until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, this wrong (probability change) special figure 1 change transition table 1 (FIG. 64 (a). ) Refer to) to select the fluctuation pattern. When the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) is set. 1 A variation pattern is selected from the normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)).

As will be described in detail later, in the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 3, variation patterns having a longer variation time than the deviation (probability variation) normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) are displayed. It is structured so that it can be easily selected. Here, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to draw more in the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, that is, to reduce the number of lottery in the first special symbol. Therefore, the number of lottery for the first special symbol in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be long can be reduced per unit time, so that the player can be in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a state advantageous to the player by setting the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 in which the small hit is won. Further, as the number of transitions is large, the number of times that the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected can be increased, so that the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol can be further reduced, and a state advantageous to the player can be set. can do.

If any of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is selected and a small hit is won, the transition counter is shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)). If the value of is any of "0 to 10", the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is set. Off (probability change) Special Figure 1 Fluctuation The number of transitions is set to 100 in the transition table 4. Further, as will be described later, in this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 (see FIG. 65), it is easy to select a variation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 to 3. It is configured. Therefore, setting the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 can be more advantageous to the player than setting the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 1 to 3. ..

Further, the number of transitions of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is 100 times, and the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is set over a long period of time. Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is drawn by the second special symbol, the jackpot C is always determined, so that the probability change game state is continuously set even after the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to be done. If the probabilistic game state is continuously set, it will be off until the first special symbol fluctuates up to the number of times set by the number of transitions (probability change). It is possible to continuously set a state that is advantageous to the person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63 (c), the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern table 202d, which is one of the variation pattern selection tables 202d of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 63 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d. In the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d, the gaming state is the probability variation game state, the hit / fail judgment result is disappointing, and any of the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 4 is set. If not, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected in this table.

In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)), the deviation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds and the normal reach having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the above and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach composed of the fluctuation time of 90 seconds are set respectively.

Further, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned and set for each fluctuation pattern, and the type of the fluctuation pattern 1 is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired at the start of the fluctuation. ..

The deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is configured so that the deviation pattern is determined with a probability of 101/199. The fluctuation time of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern selected in the probabilistic gaming state is 30 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined in the normal gaming state of 5 seconds (FIG. 11 (a)). The fluctuation time is longer than (see). Therefore, in the probabilistic gaming state, a variation pattern having a longer variation time than in the normal gaming state is easily selected in the first special symbol, and is set to be advantageous to the player. In addition, the probability of being selected is set lower than the deviation pattern, but the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and the fluctuation pattern of super reach, which are fluctuation patterns with a longer fluctuation time, are set. As a result, by determining the fluctuation pattern of the longer fluctuation time, it is possible to give the player an advantageous state (in the present embodiment, the probabilistic gaming state is given to the player for a long period of time).

Next, with reference to FIG. 64 (a), the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 will be described. FIG. 64A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1. In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) is set in the probability change gaming state, and a small hit is won. If the value of the transition counter (not shown) is any of the values of "0 to 100", the table is selected. This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 transition table 1 is set with the number of rows of 10 transfers, and is continuously set until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times or the game state is changed. It is configured to be.

In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the deviation pattern composed of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds and the normal reach composed of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds. A fluctuation pattern, a super reach fluctuation pattern composed of a fluctuation time of 90 seconds, a fluctuation pattern of long reach 1 composed of a fluctuation time of 180 seconds, and a fluctuation pattern of long reach 2 composed of a fluctuation time of 600 seconds. Fluctuation patterns are set respectively.

In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64 (a)), the long deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) was not set. Fluctuation patterns of reach 1 and long reach 2 are set. The long reach 1 and the long reach 2 have long fluctuation times of 180 seconds and 600 seconds. Therefore, during this fluctuation time, no new fluctuation is started in the first special symbol, so that the probability variation game state is continued by drawing lots in the second special symbol during that period. That is, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, the fluctuation time of the deviation of the first special symbol can be considered as a period in which the continuation of the probabilistic game is confirmed.

Here, in the probabilistic game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is deviated (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. A variation pattern is selected from 13 (b)), and if the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern is selected from the hit (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13 (c)). In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13B), the deviation pattern composed of the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected with a probability of 151/199. It is configured so that the out-of-order fluctuation pattern is extremely easy to select. Further, even the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having the longest fluctuation time has a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and the probability of being selected is 8/199, which is difficult to be selected as compared with other fluctuation patterns. Therefore, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is different in the probabilistic game state, it is easy to select the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time, so that more lottery is performed until the first special symbol changes once. 2 Can be executed with a special symbol.

Furthermore, the hold memory that becomes the jackpot B is stored in the hold of the first special symbol, and the period until the lottery result is displayed (actually, the period until the fluctuation display is started) is highly probable. It can be replaced as the period during which the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol is executed (the period during which the actual probability-changing gaming state continues).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the effect as if the probabilistic gaming state is set in a finite time is performed. In this effect, the fluctuation time (time until the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot B of the first special symbol is started) in which the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol executed in the probabilistic game state is deviated is determined, and the time is determined. It is performed as a production to notify the player as the remaining time of the probability change within the range of. By this effect, the player can play the game with the expectation that as many big hit games as possible will be executed by making as many big hits as possible with the second special symbol while the probabilistic game state remains.

In addition, the content of the newly stored reserved memory of the first special symbol is determined, the remaining period of the probabilistic gaming state is determined, and the remaining period of the probabilistic gaming state is extended within that range (FIG. 5 (FIG. 5). By executing b)), a sense of relief can be given to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the remaining period of the probabilistic gaming state will be extended. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with expectations other than the big hit, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, the symbol showing the first special symbol is a symbol sequence composed of two types of "○" and "×" in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed in two columns in parallel. Even if the fluctuation pattern is out of alignment, even if it is a fluctuation pattern that becomes reach, "○" and "×" are repeatedly displayed alternately at high speed, and when the fluctuation time elapses, a display mode (big hit) showing the result of judgment of success or failure. If there is, "○" is aligned, and if it is off, "x" is aligned or displayed as a combination of "○" and "x").

Therefore, when the player is in the probabilistic game state, he / she mainly plays the game by paying attention to the symbol indicating the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from becoming bored even if it is displayed in a variable manner for a long time. In addition, even if the player does not know that the longer the deviation time of the first special symbol is, the more advantageous the player is, the effect of notifying the remaining probable change period is displayed, so that the game is easy to understand. It can be carried out.

In the present embodiment, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, but the present invention is not limited to this. The symbol corresponding to the first special symbol may be displayed in the first display area Dm, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol may be displayed in the second display area Dn.

Furthermore, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is also displayed in a small display area with an inconspicuous symbol similar to the second display area Dn. Alternatively, it may be configured to be displayed by an LED display without being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the effect display of the probabilistic period rather than the variable display of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress the feeling of complicated playability. In the case of displaying by LED display or the like, for example, a plurality of petals may be lit by LEDs, and a combination of the lighting may be configured to notify the success / failure determination. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the LED corresponds to the second special symbol, and the player can concentrate on the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 (b) to 64 (c) and 65, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 2 to 4 will be described. FIG. 64 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2. In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2, the probability that a deviation is selected is lower than that of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 described above, while super reach and long reach 1 , The difference is that the probability that the long reach 2 is selected is high. In addition, the number of transitions is set to 20 times, which is doubled (see FIG. 63 (b)). That is, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64 (a)) has a longer fluctuation time than the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64 (b)). Since the variation pattern is easily selected, the probabilistic game state is likely to be continued for a long time, which is set in an advantageous manner for the player. Therefore, the size of the value that is advantageous to the player can be changed depending on the table selected from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)), and it is possible to predict which table is selected by the player. , You can expect a better table to be selected.

FIG. 64 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3. This deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3 is set to have a lower probability that the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64 (c)) is deviated and normal reach is selected. On the other hand, Super Reach, Long Reach 1, and Long Reach 2 are set with a high probability of being selected. Further, the number of transitions is set to 30 times, which is larger than that of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2. That is, the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3 is configured to have a longer probability variation period than the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 2, and is set as a table advantageous to the player. There is.

FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4. In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4, the probability that the deviation pattern of deviation and normal reach is selected is set lower than that of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3, and the super The probability that reach and long reach 2 are selected is set high, and instead of long reach 1, the fluctuation pattern of long reach 3 composed of 1200 seconds, which has a longer fluctuation time than long reach 2, is out of order (probability change). 1 It is set to be selected with a higher probability than the long reach 2 of the variable transition table 3. In addition, the number of transitions is set to 100, which is larger than that of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3.

Therefore, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is configured so that the variation pattern having the longest fluctuation time can be easily selected from the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3. , The probabilistic game state is configured to be easy to continue for the longest time. Therefore, it is configured as the most advantageous table for the player.

In addition, this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 wins a small hit when any of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is determined, and further shift counter. The value of is configured to be selected only with a probability of any of 0 to 10, that is, 11/199. Therefore, since the frequency is not determined for the player, it is possible to suppress a problem that the damage on the game store side becomes excessively large. Further, in the state where the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 are set, the player has a high expectation for the small hit, and the player can expect the hit / fail determination result other than the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S107) of one process in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) is the first special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 66, S230). It differs in that it has been changed to. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, their illustration and description will be omitted.

The first special symbol change start processing 2 (S230) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 2 (S230).

In the first special symbol change start processing 2 (FIG. 66, S230), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S311). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S312). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is larger than 0 (S312: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S313). .. It is determined whether the value of the transition count counter (not shown) is greater than 0.

Here, the transition count counter is set to the number of transitions (see FIG. 63 (b)) set in each of the deviation (probability variation) special figures 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 4. It is a counter for counting the number of transitions by being set and subtracted by 1 each time the first special symbol is variablely displayed. In the initialized state, the transition count counter is set to 0, which is an initial value. In addition, when the power is cut off, the data is backed up and the count value is maintained for a certain period (for example, one week).

When the value of the migration count counter is greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the migration count is set (S314: Yes), the value of the migration counter is subtracted by 1 and updated (S315). .. It is determined whether the value of the updated migration count counter is 0 (S316). When it is determined that the value of the shift count counter is 0 (S316: Yes), the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (normal table) is set (S317). After that, the process of S318 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S316 that the value of the transition count counter is greater than 0 (S316: No), the process of S318 is executed.

As described above, when the value of the shift count counter becomes 0, the normal table is set, so that the variable pattern selection table 202d determined by the shift count can be switched to the type and set. Further, since the number of transitions is set to be different depending on the set table, the player can enjoy different fluctuation pattern effects up to a different number of fluctuations.

In the process of S318, the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S318). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 is executed (S319). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (FIG. 67, S319) will be described in detail later, but is set based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). Since the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) is the same process as the process already described in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S421). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state (during probabilistic change) (S422). The determination of whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state is executed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag (not shown) is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag is on (that is, the game state is the probability change game state (during probability change)) (S422: Yes), a special hit is made based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. Whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value is determined, and the lottery result is acquired (S423). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not during probability variation)) (S422: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (Fig. 10 (b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S424).

It is determined whether the jackpot flag 203o is on (S425). Here, when the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, by using this jackpot flag 203o in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation that becomes a jackpot is not executed at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that big hits are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large.

In the process of S425, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is off (S425: Yes), the jackpot flag 203o is set to on for the first special symbol (S427). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit (S428). A jackpot symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the hit type counter (S429).

On the other hand, in S425, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is on (S425: No), the process of S430 is executed. Further, in the process of S426, if it is determined that the result of the pass / fail determination in the processes of S423 and S424 is incorrect (S426: No), the process of S430 is executed.

In the process of S430, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result is a small hit (S430). If it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a small hit (S430: Yes), the small hit process is executed (S431). The details of this small hit process (S431) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68, but the value of the migration counter (not shown) is acquired, and the migration destination table is determined based on the value. The process is executed.

After the process of S431 is executed, the first symbol display device 37 is set to display a symbol indicating a small hit of the first special symbol (S432). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S430, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is not a small hit, that is, it is a miss (S430: No), a symbol indicating the miss of the first special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. It is set to be displayed (S433). After that, this process ends.

In this way, even if the hit / fail judgment results of S423 and S424 are hit, if the jackpot flag 203o is already set to ON, it is not judged as a jackpot by the processing of S425, but is forcibly judged as a miss. Will be done. As a result, the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not fluctuate to become big hits at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the big hits from continuing in a short time.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed to be big hits at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are big hits at the same time. The variation may be configured to be performed. In such a configuration, in the probabilistic gaming state, the period of the actual probabilistic gaming state can be set longer by configuring the fluctuation time for hitting the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol to be longer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a small hit process (S431), which is one process in the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 67, S319) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit process (S431).

In the small hit process (FIG. 68, S431), first, the value of the transition counter is acquired (S441). Here, the transition counter (not shown) is set in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) is executed. This transition counter is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198", and is set to "0", which is an initial value, in the initialized state.

When the process of S441 is executed, the migration destination table is the migration counter from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)) based on the value of the migration counter, and whether or not the currently selected first special symbol is correct or not. It is selected based on the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d that is referred to when the determination result is out of order (S442). S442 sets a migration command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the type of the selected migration destination table (S443). After that, this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, a lottery for switching the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is wrong is executed. When the change of the variation pattern selection table 202d is determined, the table is set for the set number of transitions. After that, when the set number of transitions is executed, a predetermined variation pattern selection table 202d (in the present embodiment, a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 63 (c))). Can be switched to.

As a result, when the player wins the small hit, he / she can expect not only the prize ball obtained by the small hit game but also the switching of the variable pattern selection table 202d. Further, since the magnitude of the value obtained differs depending on the type of the switched variation pattern selection table 202d, it is possible to be interested in the type and improve the taste of the game.

When it was determined that the jackpot flag 203o was off, that is, when it was determined that the fluctuation of the jackpot was not started in the second special symbol (S425: No), the process of S403 or S404 was executed. It is determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203o is set to on (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type (S409). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is on in the processing of S405 (S405: Yes), or when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order in the processing of S406 (S406: No), the first 1 A symbol indicating the deviation of the first special symbol is set in the special symbol display device 37 (S410).

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special symbol jackpot random number C1 actually acquired is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203o is already set to on, that is, by the second special symbol. When the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is started, the setting of the deviation is forcibly executed by the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuations that become big hits are not executed at the same time, and the fluctuations that become big hits are continuously started in a short period of time, and the game store side. It is possible to suppress the problem that the damage becomes excessive.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

<Characteristic A group> (Make it difficult to win Special Figure 1 with electric support)
The first entrance where the game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the second entrance.
A first state in which the game ball is guided so that the game ball can easily enter the second entrance, and a state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance than in the first state. It has a movable piece that can be moved into two states, and when the movable piece is moved to the first state, the flow path through which the game ball can enter the first ball entry port is the second state. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is configured to be narrower than in the case of.

According to the game machine A1, a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port into which a game ball can enter are provided. Due to the movable change, the first state in which the game ball is guided so that the game ball can easily enter the second entrance, and the state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter in the second entrance than in the first state. It is moved to the second state. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the flow path through which the game ball can enter the first entry port is narrower than in the second state. As a result, it becomes difficult to enter one of the entrances, so that the interest of the game can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In the game machine A1, the first flow path in which the game ball easily enters the first entry port and the second flow path in which the game ball easily enters the second entry port rather than the first flow path. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the game ball can easily flow down the second flow path, and the game can be played more than when the first flow path is in the second state. A game machine A2 characterized in that it regulates the amount of flow of a ball.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, a first flow path in which the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry port and a second flow path in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry port are provided. There is. By moving the movable change to the first state, the game ball can easily flow down the second flow path, and the amount of the game ball flowing down the first flow path is regulated as compared with the case where the game ball flows down in the second state. .. This has the effect of efficiently reducing the amount of balls entering the first ball entry port.

In the game machine A1 or the game machine A2, based on the game ball entering the first entrance, the winning / failing determination of the first lottery game is executed, and the game ball enters the second entrance. Based on the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the second lottery game and the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the player is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. It is characterized by having a game state determining means for determining either one of the special gaming states, and a gaming state setting means for setting the normal gaming state or the special gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means. The game machine A3.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1 or A2, the following effects are played. That is, based on the hit / fail determination means, the hit / fail judgment of the first lottery game is executed based on the game ball entering the first entry slot, and the game ball enters the second entry slot. Then, the winning / failing determination of the second lottery game is executed. Based on the determination of winning by the hit / fail determination means, either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means. The normal game state or the special game state determined by the game state determining means is set by the game state setting means. As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that a special game state will be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine A3, the game state setting means sets, as the special game state, a higher probability of being determined to be a hit by the hit / fail determination means than in the case of the normal game state. Machine A4.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A3, as a special game state, the probability of being determined as a hit by the hit / fail determination means is set higher by the state setting means than in the case of the normal game state. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine A3 or A4, the game state determining means determines the normal game state and the special game state based on the game ball entering the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port. Either one is determined, and the ratio of determining the normal gaming state and the special gaming state is different between the first entry port and the second entry port. Characterized game machine A5.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A3 or A4, the normal game state is based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port by the game state determination means. And the special game state are determined, and the ratio of determining the normal game state and the special game state is different between the first entry port and the second entry opening, so that the second entry is determined. There is an effect that the lottery can be expected to be executed at the ball mouth.

In the game machine A5, the game state determining means determines the normal game state when the game ball enters the first entry port, as compared with the case where the game ball enters the second entry port. A game machine A6 characterized by being easy to play.

According to the game machine A6, when the game ball enters the first entrance, the normal gaming state is more likely to be determined by the game state determining means than when the game ball enters the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continuously play the special game state.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, there is a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. And
The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the privilege giving means grants a privilege having a different size between the first entrance and the second entrance.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A6, the following effects are played. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Benefits of different sizes are given by the privilege giving means between the first entrance and the second entrance. This has the effect that more benefits can be given to the player.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the movable determination means for determining whether or not to move the movable piece from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the special game state The gaming machine A8 is characterized by having a movable rate setting means for easily determining that the movable piece is moved from the second state to the first state by the movable determining means when set. ..

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, it is determined whether or not the movable piece is moved from the second state to the first state by the movable determination means. When the special gaming state is set, it is easily determined by the movable rate setting means that the movable piece is moved from the second state to the second state by the movable determining means. This has the effect that the interest of the game can be easily changed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, based on the launching means capable of launching the game ball, the adjusting means for adjusting the launching force of the launching means based on the player's operation, and the player's first operation. The first flow-down area where the game ball launched by the adjusting means adjusted by the firing force flows down, and the game ball launched by the adjusting means based on the second operation of the player flows down. It has a game area in which a second flow area different from the first flow area is formed, and the game ball that has flowed down the first flow area is configured to be able to enter only the first entry port. The game machine A9 is characterized in that the game ball that has flowed down the second flow-down region is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port, respectively.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A8, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching means. The firing force of the launching means is adjusted to the adjusting means based on the operation of the player. The first flow-down area in which the game ball launched by the firing force launched by the launching force adjusted by the adjusting means based on the player's first operation flows down, and the adjusting means based on the player's second operation. A second flow-down region in which the game ball launched by the firing force adjusted by the ball flows down is formed in the game region. The game ball that has flowed down the first flow-down area is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry port, and the game ball that has flowed down the second flow-down area enters the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port, respectively. It is configured to be possible. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine A9, as the first ball entry port, a common first ball entry port is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow-down area or the second flow-down area can enter, and the second flow-down area. The game machine A10 is characterized in that at least a one-sided first ball entry port on which only a game ball that has flowed down the area can enter is arranged.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, a common first ball is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow-down area or the second flow-down area can enter as the first ball entry port. Since at least the entry port and the first entry port on one side on which the game ball that has flowed down the second flow area can enter are arranged, there is an effect that the interest can be effectively changed depending on the game state.

In any of the game machines A1 to A10, the first ball entry port is arranged below the second ball entry port, and the movable piece is moved to the first state, so that the movable piece is movable. The game machine A11 is characterized in that the passage of the game ball through the flow path capable of entering the first ball entrance is restricted by the piece as compared with the second state.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A10, the following effects are played. That is, the first ball entry port is arranged below the second ball entry port. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the passage of the game ball through the flow path where the movable piece can enter the first ball entrance is restricted as compared with the second state. This has the effect that the inflow amount of the game ball can be easily changed.

In any of the game machines A3 to A11, based on the special game state being set by the game state setting means, the movable piece is set to be more easily moved to the second state than the normal game state. A game machine A12 characterized by having a setting means.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines A3 to A11, the movable piece is made more than the normal game state by the movable setting means based on the fact that the special game state is set by the game state setting means. Since it is set to be easily movable in the second state, it is possible to set a period that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored.

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, the movable piece has a passage port through which the game ball can pass, and the movable piece has a passage gate in which the lottery condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the passage port. In the case of the two states, a common flow path, which is a flow path through which the game ball can enter, is formed at the passage gate or the first entry port, and is moved to the first state. It is characterized in that the entry of the game ball into the first entry port is restricted by the movable piece, and a single flow path, which is a flow path through which the game ball enters the passage gate, is formed. Game machine A13 to play.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A12, the following effects are played. That is, a passage gate is provided which has a passage port through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the passage port. When the movable piece is in the second state, a common flow path, which is a flow path through which the game ball can enter, is formed at the passing gate or the first entry port. When the movable piece is moved to the first state, the movable piece regulates that the game ball enters the first entry port, and the single flow path, which is the flow path for the game ball to enter the passing gate, is formed. It is formed. This has the effect that the player can play the game advantageously.

In any of the game machines A3 to A12, the first identification information indicating the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and the second identification information indicating the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are simultaneously displayed. The gaming machine A14, characterized in that it has a display control means capable of being displayed by the means.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A3 to A13, the first identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first lottery game by the hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / miss judgment of the second lottery game are shown. Since the second identification information is simultaneously sent to the display means by the display control means, the player can efficiently play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic B group> (Freeze production produces the probability change period in time)
Based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, the winning / failing determination of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the establishment of the second lottery condition, the winning / failing determination of the second lottery game is executed, and the winning / failing determination means thereof. A display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the first lottery game and the second identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the second lottery game on the display means at the same time. , Dynamically determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means from a plurality of dynamic display periods, respectively. At least one of the display period determining means, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player when the winning / failing judgment result is correct, and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given to the player. In a game machine having a privilege determining means for determining to be granted, the privilege determining means determines the second privilege based on the hit of the second lottery game rather than the hit of the first lottery game. The gaming machine B1 is easy to use, and has an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means.

According to the game machine B1, the winning / failing determination means executes the winning / failing determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, and executes the winning / failing determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition. Will be done. The first identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the first lottery game by the winning / failing determination means and the second identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the second lottery game are dynamically displayed on the display means at the same time by the display control means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are set from a plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining means. Each is decided. It is a privilege decision to give the player at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. Determined by means. The second privilege is more likely to be determined by the privilege determining means based on the winning of the second lottery game than the winning of the first lottery game. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. As a result, it is possible to give the player a novel effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine B1, the dynamic display period determining means determines the first dynamic display period from a first dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the dynamic display period is divided into a plurality of dynamic display periods. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the second dynamic display period is determined from the configured second dynamic display period group.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the first dynamic display period is determined from the first dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining means. Since the second dynamic display period is determined from the second dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods, there is an effect that a variety of dynamic display periods can be selected. ..

In the game machine B2, the first motion of 1 is based on a storage means in which a plurality of first dynamic display period groups composed of the plurality of dynamic display periods are stored and a predetermined condition is satisfied from the storage means. It has a group determining means for determining a target display period group, and the dynamic display period determining means is one of the first dynamic display periods from the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means. The gaming machine B3, which is characterized in that it determines.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of first dynamic display period groups composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored by the storage means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition from the storage means, one first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means. From the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means, the first dynamic display period of 1 is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. This has the effect that the game can be easily controlled.

In the game machine B3, in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period is easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. A game machine B4 characterized in that a target display period group is included.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups. Since the long first dynamic display period group that is easily configured is included, the number of times of the first lottery game can be reduced as compared with the number of times of the second lottery game, and it is possible to provide a game that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to shift to the special gaming state.

In the game machine B4, the group determining means is configured to be able to determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination of the second privilege. Machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, the long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means based on the determination of the second privilege. It has the effect of improving.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, the effect executing means displays the effect information based on the information of the second dynamic display period on the display means.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines B1 to B5, the effect information based on the information of the second dynamic display period is displayed on the display means by the effect execution means. Has the effect of improving.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, a special game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the hit / fail determination means is set with a normal probability and a special game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is set higher than the normal game state. The game state setting means for setting at least one of the game states and the privilege determining means include the normal game state as one of the first benefits and the special game state as one of the second benefits. A game machine B7 characterized in that at least one of them is determined.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B6, the following effects are played. That is, either the normal game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the hit / fail determination means is set with a normal probability or the special game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is set higher than the normal game state is a game. It is set by the state setting means. At least one of the normal gaming state as one of the first benefits and the special gaming state as one of the second benefits is determined by the privilege determining means. This has the effect of further improving the interest of the game.

Based on the setting of the special gaming state in any of the game machines B1 to B7, the dynamic display period determining means determines the first dynamic display period when the second dynamic display is determined. The gaming machine B8, characterized in that it is easy to determine a dynamic display period in which the dynamic display period is longer than the period.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B7, the second dynamic display period is determined when the first dynamic display period is determined based on the setting of the special game state. Since the dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period is more likely to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means, there is an effect that an advantageous state can be provided to the player by further reducing the number of first lottery games. ..

In the game machine B7 or B8, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, the acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information used for the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means, and the acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means. A storage means for storing lottery information, a pre-winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination in advance before the winning / failing determination is made for the lottery information stored in the storage means, and the dynamic The pre-dynamic display period discriminating means for preliminarily determining the dynamic display period determined by the display period determining means and the pre-dynamic display period determining means for determining the special gaming state are determined. Based on the determination result, the effect executing means has a period determination means for determining the period until the normal game state is set, and the effect executing means performs the effect based on the information of the period determined by the period determination means. A game machine B9 characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B7 or B8, the following effects are played. That is, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, the lottery information used for the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means is acquired by the acquiring means. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Prior to the winning / failing determination of the lottery information stored in the storage means, the winning / failing determination means is executed in advance by the winning / failing determination means. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is determined in advance by the pre-dynamic display period determining means. When the special game state is determined, the period until the normal game state is set by the period determination means is determined based on the determination result determined by the pre-dynamic display period determination means. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the period determined by the period determination means. This has the effect of further improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine B9, when it is determined that the lottery information to be a hit is stored as a result of the determination by the advance hit / fail determination means, the gaming state determined by the game state determination means is determined in advance. The pre-game state determination means for determining is provided, and when the pre-game state determination means determines that the normal game state is determined, the effect execution means determines the normal game state. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the effect is executed based on the information of the period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of the game machine B9, the following effects are played. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance winning / failing determination means, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is determined in advance by the advance gaming state determining means. To. When it is determined by the pre-game state determination means that the normal game state is determined, the effect is executed based on the information of the period until the dynamic display of the identification information for which the normal game state is determined is completed. The production is executed by means. As a result, it is possible to give the player a novel effect, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine B9, when it is determined that the lottery information to be a hit is stored as a result of the determination by the advance hit / fail determination means, the gaming state determined by the game state determination means is determined in advance. The effect executing means has the pre-game state determination means for determining, and when it is determined that the lottery information in the normal game state is not stored, the lottery information stored in the storage means is stored. The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that the effect is executed based on the information of the period within the period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the above is completed.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B9, the following effects are played. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance winning / failing determination means, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is determined in advance by the advance gaming state determining means. To. When it is determined that the lottery information in the normal gaming state is not stored, the information for the period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is completed is used. Based on this, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a novel effect.

In any of the game machines B7 to B11, the group determining means determines the long first dynamic display period group when the special gaming state is set. B12.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B7 to B11, when the special game state is set, the first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means, so that the change It has the effect of being able to produce a rich variety of effects.

In any of the game machines B4 to B12, the long first dynamic display period group is more likely to determine a longer dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups. A game machine B13 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effects of the game machines B4 to B12, the dynamic display period longer than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups is longer by the dynamic display period determining means. Since it is easily determined from the group, there is an effect that it is easy for the player to set an advantageous state.

In any of the game machines B1 to B13, a state setting means for setting at least a first state in which the second lottery condition is likely to be satisfied and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be satisfied than the first state. The game machine B14 is characterized in that the first privilege is configured so that the second state can be set more easily than the second privilege.

According to the game machine B14, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B13, the following effects are played. That is, the state setting means sets at least a first state in which the second lottery condition is likely to be satisfied and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be satisfied than the first state. The first privilege is configured so that the second state can be set more easily than the second privilege. This has the effect of facilitating the setting of a state advantageous to the player and suppressing the problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

<Characteristic C group> (Freeze effect can be selected by switching the table when the probability change is medium or small)
A determination means for executing the determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first lottery condition and determining the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition, and the first determination means by the determination means. A display control means capable of simultaneously displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the lottery game and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game on the display means, and the display control means dynamically. A dynamic display period determining means for determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be displayed and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information from a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the first dynamic display period determining means. After the 1 identification information or the second identification information is displayed as a determination result indicating a hit, at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. In a gaming machine having a privilege determining means for deciding to grant either one, the privilege determining means displays the second identification information as a hit than when the first identification information is displayed as a hit. The second privilege is configured to be easier to determine, and the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods. A storage means in which a plurality of first dynamic display period groups are stored, and a group determining means for determining one of the first dynamic display period groups from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means. In the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period can be easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The target display period group is included, and the group determining means may determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination of a specific determination result by the determination means. A game machine C1 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the game machine C1, the determination means executes the determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, and executes the determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition. The first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game are simultaneously displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are set from a plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining means. It is determined. After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed as a determination result indicating a hit, at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. Granting either one is determined by the privilege determining means. When the second identification information is displayed as a hit than when the first identification information is displayed as a hit, the second privilege is more easily determined by the privilege determining means. As the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, a plurality of first dynamic display period groups composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored by the storage means. One first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means. The plurality of first dynamic display period groups include a long first dynamic display period group configured so that a first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period can be easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means based on the determination of the specific determination result by the determining means. Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel playability. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In the game machine C1, the dynamic display period determining means is the first when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied. When the second dynamic display start condition for determining the dynamic display period and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied, the second dynamic display period is set respectively. A gaming machine that is determined individually and has an effect executing means that executes an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the first dynamic display period is determined when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied by the dynamic display period determining means. The second dynamic display period is determined when the second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. As a result, it is possible to give the player a novel effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The game machine C1 or C2 is characterized by having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination of the hit or the specific determination result by the determination means. Game machine C3 to play.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the determination means determines that the result is a hit or a specific determination result. Since it is executed by, there is an effect that the player can expect other than hitting.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, it is set with a normal game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the determination means is set with a normal probability, and a special probability with a higher probability of being determined to be a hit than the normal probability. It has a game state setting means for setting at least one of the special game states, and when the second privilege is determined, the special game state is set by the game state setting means as one of the second benefits. Is configured to be easier to set than the first privilege.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C3, the following effects are played. That is, at least one of a normal gaming state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the determination means is set by a normal probability and a special gaming state in which a special probability of being determined to be a hit is higher than the normal probability. Is set by the game state setting means. When the second privilege is determined, as one of the second privilege, the special gaming state is set more easily than the first privilege by the game state setting means. As a result, it is possible to set a more advantageous gaming state for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the determination means determines the specific determination result in the gaming machine C4 when the special gaming state is set.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C4, when the special game state is set, it is determined as a specific determination result by the determination means, so that the value of the special game state can be further increased. There is an effect.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, the plurality of first dynamic display period groups include the first dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than the long first dynamic display period group. A special length first dynamic display period group configured to be easily determined by the target display period determining means is included, and the group determining means determines the long first dynamic display period group. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that when the specific determination is executed by the determination means, the special length first dynamic display period group can be determined.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C5, the following effects are played. That is, in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, a first dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than the long first dynamic display period group is easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The special length first dynamic display period group is included. When a specific determination is executed by the determination means when the long first dynamic display period group is determined, the special long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means. Thereby, the value of obtaining a specific determination result can be further increased. Therefore, in addition to the hit, there is an effect that it is possible to expect a specific determination result.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, the group determining means determines the long first dynamic display period group, and then the first dynamic display is predetermined based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine C7 characterized in that it determines a period group.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C6, after the long first dynamic display period group is determined, it is predetermined by the group determination means based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Since the first dynamic display period group is determined, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines C1 to C7, a state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the second lottery condition is satisfied and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state. The game machine C8 is characterized in that the first privilege is configured so that the first state is set more easily by the state setting means than the second privilege.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C7, the following effects are played. That is, the first state in which the second lottery condition is satisfied and the second state in which the second lottery condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state are set by the state setting means. The first privilege is configured so that the first state is more easily set by the state setting means than the second privilege. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

Among the game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, and C1 to C8, the game machine Z1 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A game machine Z2 in any of the game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, and C1 to C8, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed as a display device. Is executed in. If the lottery result is a win, a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a high-probability game state in which the probability of being judged as a win is high after the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed is also the starting point. It is executed based on the fact that the game ball is entered. When set to the high-probability gaming state, if it is decided to shift to the normal-probability gaming state when a hit occurs in the high-probability gaming state, a configuration is proposed to shift to the normal-probability gaming state. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).
By the way, in such a gaming machine, in order to provide a fair game to the player, it is necessary to set a constant probability of shifting to the high probability gaming state when the ball enters the starting port. In the above case, since the probability of shifting to the high-probability gaming state is always constant, there is a problem that the game is not sharp and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage in the above-mentioned game machine.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes the winning / failing determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first winning / failing determination condition, and the second is based on the establishment of the second winning / failing determination condition. The winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the lottery game and the first identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the first lottery game by the winning / failing determination means are dynamically displayed in the order in which the first winning / failing determination condition is satisfied. The first display means and the second identification information indicating the result of the win / loss judgment of the second lottery game by the hit / miss judgment means are dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit / miss judgment condition is satisfied, and the second display means and the above. A display control means capable of dynamically displaying and controlling the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and a hit / fail determination result by the hit / fail determination means are successful. , A privilege game that grants a privilege game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means in a display mode indicating a hit. Until the dynamic display start condition is established, which has an execution means and starts the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established pass / fail determination condition based on the establishment of the first pass / fail determination condition. , The dynamic display start condition for suspending the right to execute the first lottery game and starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established winning / failing determination condition based on the establishment of the second winning / failing determination condition. The dynamic display start condition is established for the holding means for holding the right to execute the second lottery game and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination condition until is established. The dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / miss determination condition is determined based on the number of holds held by the holding means, and the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. With the opportunity, the dynamic display mode determining means that is determined based on the number of holdings held by the holding means, and each hold held by the holding means each time a predetermined determination condition is satisfied. When the pre-dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode and the first or second hit / fail determination condition are satisfied based on the number of holds of the holding means when the determination condition is satisfied. In addition, until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the order in which the first hit / fail judgment condition and the second hit / fail judgment condition are combined and the pre-dynamic display mode determination means are determined. A hold information storage means for storing hold information having at least information about a dynamic display mode, and a hold information thereof. While distinguishing between the hold information of the first hit / fail judgment condition and the second hit / fail judgment condition stored in the information storage means, the hit / miss of the first hit / miss judgment condition and the second hit / miss judgment condition are combined for each hold information. Each time the hold display means in which the order of establishment of the determination conditions is displayed in an identifiable hold display mode and the determination condition of the pre-dynamic display mode determination means are satisfied, each stored in the hold information storage means. For each hold information, based on the dynamic display mode determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determination means for each hold information and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed. It is determined that the time information until the first or second identification information starts to be dynamically displayed is determined or updated, and the start time information updating means to be stored in the reserved information storage means and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Taking the opportunity, the hold display modes displayed on the hold display means are rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display is started, based on the time information stored in the hold information storage means by the start time information update means. It has a sorting means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the winning / failing determination means executes the winning / failing determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, and the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition. Is executed. The first identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the first lottery game by the winning / failing determination means and the second identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the second lottery game are dynamically displayed on the display means at the same time by the display control means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are set from a plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining means. Each is decided. It is a privilege decision to give the player at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. Determined by means. The second privilege is more likely to be determined by the privilege determining means based on the winning of the second lottery game than the winning of the first lottery game. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means.
As a result, it is possible to give the player a novel effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.
According to the game machine of the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the first dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining means. The first dynamic display period is determined from, and the second dynamic display period is determined from the second dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods. It has the effect of being able to select.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, according to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, the following effect is played. That is, a plurality of first dynamic display period groups composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored by the storage means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition from the storage means, one first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means. From the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means, the first dynamic display period of 1 is determined by the dynamic display period determining means.
This has the effect that the game can be easily controlled.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 Left first starting port (first ball entry means ) , right first starting port (third ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means)
112 Launch control device (launch means)
640 Second starting port (second ball entry means )
S406 First determination means
S505 1st dynamic display period determination means
S612 Part of the game state setting means
S806 Second determination means
S905 Second dynamic display period determination means
S1072 Part of the game state setting means
S1414 Production execution means

Claims (1)

The game area where the game ball can flow down,
In a game machine having a launching means capable of causing the game ball to reach the game area, the firing intensity can be changed.
The game area includes at least a first game area in which a game ball launched by the firing means at one firing intensity can flow down, and a game ball launched at a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity. It has a second game area different from the first game area that can flow down, and has a second game area.
In the first game area, a first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter is provided.
A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball into the second game area, the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, and the second ball entry means. A third ball entry means different from that is provided,
The second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launching means at the one firing intensity cannot enter.
A first determination means that executes a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the third entry means.
A second determination means that executes a second determination different from the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means.
It is possible to dynamically display the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the first determination means and the second identification information for indicating the second determination result of the second determination means on the display means at the same time. Possible display control means and
The first dynamic display period determining means for determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and the first dynamic display period determining means.
It has a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means.
When the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, or when the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed. , The specific game corresponding to each is executed,
At least, based on the fact that the first condition that can be satisfied by executing the first determination is satisfied, the specific game based on the second determination result is more likely to be executed as the gaming state than the first gaming state. 2 A game in which a game state is set, and in the case of the second game state, the first game state is set based on the fact that a second condition that can be satisfied by executing the first determination is satisfied. State setting means and
When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second gaming state is set based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the first dynamic display period determining means. A production execution means that suggests a period that can be set continuously,
A game ball is provided during the first specific game provided in the second game area and executed when at least the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result of the specific game is stopped and displayed. It has a specific ball entry means that enables ball entry, and has.
When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the display means is provided with the first dynamic display mode for showing the dynamic display of the first identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that the information is displayed smaller than the second dynamic display mode for showing the dynamic display of information.

Images